Panasonic DMREX83 Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions

DVD Recorder

Model No. DMR-EX83EB

Dear customer

Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum performance and safety, please read these instructions carefully.

Before connecting, operating or adjusting this product, please read the instructions completely. Please keep this manual for future reference.

P8 – 14

DVB and the DVB logos are trademarks of the DVB Project.

Notice for DVB functions

This DVD Recorder is for viewing and recording free to view channels only, not Pay TV or encrypted channels unless connected to an external source capable of receiving Pay TV or encrypted channels. This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.

Region number supported by this unit

Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.

≥The region number of this unit is “2”. ≥The unit will play DVDs marked with labels containing “2” or “ALL”.

Web Site: http://www.panasonic-europe.com

Model number suffix “EB” denotes UK model.

Example:

2 ALL

VQT2J27

Features

Getting started

Convenient Functions!

Linked operations with the TV

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using VIERA Link or Q Link. ≥ Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link

“HDAVI Control

DIGA

VIERA

”/Q Link) (> 44)

VIERA remote control

Pause the TV programme you are watching

≥ Pause Live TV (> 43)

Easy access to various functions

You can access the main function quickly and easily from FUNCTION MENU. ≥ FUNCTION MENU Display (> 43)

Select

10/10

RETURN

OPTION

a function and an item.

You can access selected function easily.

VIDEO

11/10

DolphinsChantal Show

Select

Info

Page 02/02

PICTURE

MUSIC

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN

Remain

30:00 SP

Video

Picture Music

DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others Drive Select

FREEVIEW+TM functions

≥ Guide Link (> 22) ≥ Series recording (> 34) ≥ Split Programme (> 22)

Linked timer recordings with external equipment

You can set the Timer Recordings on Digital STB/ Digital Satellite Receiver when it is connected to this unit with Scart cable. ≥ Ext Link (> 28)

High Quality Picture

HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)

≥ Connection with HDMI terminal (> 12) ≥ Deep Colour (> 96)

Digital Switchover

Easy to Find and Select!

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the daily/weekly or series timer recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10/10

11/10

DolphinsChantal Show

OPTION

RETURN

Page 02/02

Select

Info

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

Grouped title

Starting in late 2007 and ending in 2012, TV services in the UK will go completely digital, TV region by TV region. If you are missing any channels, it may be that they are not available in your area, or that your aerial needs upgrading. If you have any questions, please call Digital UK on 08456 50 50 50 or visit www.digitaluk.co.uk Digital Switchover will cover a period of several weeks. When it starts some Digital TV programmes will be missing. You will need to retune your DVD Recorder each time this happens to recover your digital programmes.

To retune your DVD Recorder

¼“DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu (> 71)

VQT2J27

Accessories

Please check and identify the supplied accessories. Use numbers indicated in parentheses when asking for replacement parts. (Product numbers correct as of December 2009. These may be subject to change.)

∏ 1 Remote control (N2QAYB000462) ∏ 1 AC mains lead (K2CT2YY00003)

≥For use with this unit only. Do not use it with

other equipment. Also, do not use cords for other equipment with this unit.

∏ 2 Batteries for remote control

(R6 Size)

Sales and Support Information

Customer Care Centre

≥For customers within the UK: 0844 844 3852 ≥For customers within the Republic of Ireland: 01 289 8333 ≥Visit our website for product information

www.panasonic.co.uk

≥E-mail: customer.care@panasonic.co.uk

Direct Sales at Panasonic UK

≥For customers: 0844 844 3856 ≥Order accessory and consumable items for your product with ease

and confidence by phoning our Customer Care Centre Monday– Thursday 9.00 a.m.–5.30 p.m., Friday 9.30 a.m.–5.30 p.m. (Excluding public holidays).

Caution for AC Mains Lead

For your safety, please read the following text carefully.

This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5-ampere and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark Ï or the BSI mark Ì on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local dealer. .

CAUTION!

IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13- AMPERE SOCKET.

∏ 1 RF coaxial cable (K1TWACC00003)

≥Or go on line through our Internet Accessory ordering application at

www.pas-europe.com.

≥Most major credit and debit cards accepted. ≥All enquiries transactions and distribution facilities are provided

directly by Panasonic UK Ltd.

≥It couldn’t be simpler! ≥Also available through our Internet is direct shopping for a wide

range of finished products, take a browse on our website for further details.

Interested in purchasing an extended guarantee? Please call 0870 240 6284 or visit our website www.panasonic.co.uk/guarantee

WARNING: DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE LETTER E, BY THE EARTH SYMBOL Ó OR COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN/YELLOW.

THIS PLUG IS NOT WATERPROOF—KEEP DRY.

Before use

Remove the connector cover.

How to replace the fuse

The location of the fuse differ according to the type of AC mains plug (figures A and B). Confirm the AC mains plug fitted and follow the instructions below. Illustrations may differ from actual AC mains plug.

1.Open the fuse cover with a screwdriver.

Figure A Figure B

Fuse cover

If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as stated below. If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.

IMPORTANT

The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue: Neutral, Brown: Live. As these colours may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured Blue must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured Black or Blue. The wire which is coloured Brown must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured Brown or Red.

2.Replace the fuse and close or attach the fuse cover.

Figure A Figure B

Fuse (5 ampere)

VQT2J27

Safety precautions

Table of Contents

Placement

Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby shortening the unit’s service life.

Do not place heavy items on the unit.

Vol tage

Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit and cause a fire.

Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.

AC mains lead protection

Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.

Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC mains lead can cause electric shock.

Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric shock.

Foreign matter

Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric shock or malfunction.

Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the power supply and contact your dealer.

Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.

Service

Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.

Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power source if it is not to be used for a long time.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are registered trademarks, & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under

DivX license.

HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the United States and other countries.

HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.

Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.

The FREEVIEW service is subject to coverage. An aerial upgrade may be required. The FREEVIEW, FREEVIEW+, FREEVIEW HD and FREEVIEW+ HD words and logos are trade marks of DTV Services LTD. DTV Services Ltd 2002, 2008.

Getting started

Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Sales and Support Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Caution for AC Mains Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Remote Control Information/Unit Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Quick Start Guide

Location of Parts/Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Main Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

The Unit’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Basic Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Connecting to a Television only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and

a Digital Satellite Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Connecting AC mains lead (included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia

Interface) Cable (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Setting the Channels and Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

HDD and Disc Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Usable Discs for Recording and Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Play-only Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Discs that Cannot be Played . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type of connected

TV. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

USB Memory and Card Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

DivX files, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . 18

Basic Operations

Watching Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Watching Digital Satellite Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs . . . . . 20

Recording Television Programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Timer Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Deleting Titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

DELETE Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Deleting Titles During Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Advanced Features

Notes for Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Advanced Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Recording Modes and Durations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

When the format confirmation screen is displayed . . . . . . . . . . 26

When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Specifying the Recording Time

— One Touch Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver or External

equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Manual Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Linked timer recordings with external equipment (SKY Digital

STB/digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Recording from an External Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Recording from a VCR, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Recording from a DV Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Advanced Timer Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Manual timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Language for broadcast with multi-audio or multi-subtitle . . . . 30

To cancel a timer recording in progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

If the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears . . . . . . . 31

Check, Change, Delete Programmes,

or Resolve Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

To deactivate timer programme

(e.g. to interrupt a daily or weekly timer programming) . . . . . 31

Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Making timer recordings on the television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

VQT2J27

GUIDE Plus+ system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Using the GUIDE Plus+ list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

View advertisement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or

category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Searching for the programme from the GUIDE Plus+ list. . . . . 35

Advanced Playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Selecting Titles to Play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Skip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Quick View (Play k 1.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Direct Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Slow-motion Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Frame-by-Frame Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Time Slip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Create Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Playing DivX, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG). . . . . . 38

Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Playing DivX video contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Playing music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Start Slideshow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

To play music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Convenient Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

FUNCTION MENU Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

To pause the TV programme you are watching

—Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI

Control

Easy control only with VIERA remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

”/Q Link) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Information Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Digital Channel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

New Channel Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Advanced Editing

Titles—Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Accessing the Title View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Title Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Chapters—Creating and Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Accessing the Chapter View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Chapter Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . 51

Accessing the Playlist (Video) View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Creating Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Editing Playlists (Video)/Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Still Pictures and Music—Editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View. . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Album (still picture)/Picture Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Accessing the Album and Track View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Album and Track Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator . . . 55

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Picture) . . . . . . . . 56

Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Creating Playlists (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Editing Playlists (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Editing still pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Copying titles or Playlists (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Copying using the copying list

—Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R and +R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Copying Video (MPEG2) from an SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Copy Video ( MPEG2 ) from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Copying Still Pictures/Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Copying using the copying list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Copying new still pictures on the SD card or USB memory

—Copy New Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

About the Gracenote® Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Copying music from a CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/

DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

To update Gracenote

Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Setting Menus

Setting On-Screen Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Accessing the On-Screen Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

HDD, DVD and Card Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Accessing the Management Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

Accessing the Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Playback/Recording Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Picture and Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Display and Connection Settings/System Settings . . . . . . 76

System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Other Settings

Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Using the Unit’s Remote Control to Operate the TV. . . . . . . . . 79

Reference

Additional Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette

Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Using an Audio/Video Cable (not included) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Adding an Amplifer or Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Media Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Inserting Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Inserting/Removing the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Inserting/Removing the SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Disc and Card Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Discs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

On the Unit’s Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

On the TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Troubleshooting Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

When Other Panasonic Products Respond to

this Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

To Reset This Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

General Issues:Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

General Issues:Displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

General Issues:Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

General Issues:GUIDE Plus+. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

General Issues:DVB-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

General Issues:VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

General Issues:USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Playback Issues:Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Playback Issues:Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Playback Issues:Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Playback Issues:Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Playback Issues:Still Pictures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Recording Issues:

Recording/Timer Recording/Copying/External input . . . . . . . 93

Recording Issues:Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Editing Issues: HDD & DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Editing Issues: Still Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . back cover

≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.

P8 – 14

VQT2J27

HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care

The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device that is easily susceptible to damage. As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.

∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust

Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.

∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device

The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.

∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD

If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.

≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.

∫ Setup precautions

≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan and

the cooling vents on the side are covered up.

≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to

vibration or impact.

≥Do not place on anything that generates

heat like a video cassette recorder, etc.

≥Do not place in an area often subject to

temperature changes.

≥Place in an area where condensation does not

occur. Condensation is a phenomenon where moisture forms on a cold surface when there is an extreme change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal damage to the unit.

≥Conditions where condensation may occur

– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from a

very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of the HDD and may

cause damage to the HDD heads, etc. – When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room. – During the rainy season.

In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until condensation is gone.

DO NOT

This unit

VCR

∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or

breakdown

Please be aware that the performance of the optical pick-up assemby may be adversely affected if the unit is exposed to nicotine smoke. If replacement is required due to this reason it will not be covered within the terms of warranty.

∫ While operating

≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD may

become damaged.)

≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket,

or flip the power breaker switch. While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or movement due to rotation is normal.

∫ When moving the unit

1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.) 2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket. 3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.

2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock. (Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for a short time.)

∫ HDD recording time remaining

This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording. If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a Playlist (Video) will not increase the amount of time.)

∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).

VQT2J27

Remote Control Information/Unit Care

R6/LR6, AA

Remote control signal sensor

This unit

Do not place the unit on amplifiers or equipment that may become hot.

The heat can damage the unit.

DO NOT

Remote Control Information

About batteries

≥Insert so the poles (i and j) match those in the remote control.

Using the remote control

Aim at the sensor, avoiding obstacles, up to a maximum range of 7m directly in front of the unit.

≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries. ≥Do not mix old and new batteries. ≥Do not use different types at the same time. ≥Do not heat or expose to flame. ≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct

sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.

≥Do not take apart or short circuit. ≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries. ≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.

Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.

Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.

Unit Care

The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust. Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.

To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.

≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit. ≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the instructions

that came with the cloth.

Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and viewing with pleasure.

Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it impossible to record or play discs. Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year, depending on frequency of use and the operating environment. Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.

DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E ≥This lens cleaner may not be available for sale in all countries, e.g.

not available in Germany, please consult your Panasonic dealer for advice.

The distance and angles are an approximate.

Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty. Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the unit.

The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no responsibility and offers no compensation for any subsequent damage caused by such loss. Examples of causes of such losses are

≥ A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another

company.

≥ A disc used as described above and then played again in this unit. ≥ A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this

unit.

VQT2J27

Location of Parts/Controls

Quick Start Guide

Remote Control

DRIVE

SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

OPTION

REC

TEXT STTL

VOL

INPUT SELECT

SLOW SEARCH

PAUSE

PLAYx1. 3

PAUSE LIVE TV

MANUAL SKIP

-10s +60s

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINKREC MODE

DISPLAY TIME SLIP

PAGE

PROG/CHECK

CHAPTER

EXITSTATUS

RETURN

1 Turn the unit on or off ......................................................... (> 13)

2 Select drive [HDD, DVD or SD] .................................... (> 20, 21)

3 Select channels and title numbers etc./

Enter numbers..................................................................... (> 13)

4 To delete unwanted recorded titles,

timer programmes, still pictures or music ............... (> 23, 31, 55)

5 Basic operations for recording and play

[PAUSE LIVE TV] Pause the TV programme you are watching (> 43)

Show the digital channel information /Programme information within GUIDE Plus+ screen

/Show status messages/Show Properties screen...............(

>33, 46, 47)

7 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR ......................................... (> 36, 38)

8 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame...................................... (> 13, 37)

9 Show OPTION menu

– for accessing Slideshow or Standby Settings, etc. – for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc. (> 36, 41, 48, 50) – for showing advertisements (> 33) – for searching for programmes (> 35) – for showing Audio Description screen (> 46) – for Viewing the Top Menu of DVD-Video (> 20)

: Use Colour buttons (red, green, yellow, blue) according to on-

screen instructions.

– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 36, 40, 42) – for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 61) – for switching PICTURE/Playlists (> 64) – for GUIDE Plus+ operations (> 33) – for deactivating timer programme (> 31) – for showing the Series Information screen (> 34) – for selecting programme category (> 30, 34, 46) – for editing Favourites (> 72)

; Recording function

[¥ REC]: Start recording .............................................................................. (> 21)

[REC MODE]: Change recording mode ........................................................ (> 21)

[EXT LINK]: Linked timer recordings with external equipment...................... (> 28)

[¥ DIRECT TV REC]: Direct TV Recording ................................................. (> 26)

< DVB function

[TEXT ]: Show Digital Teletext service..................................................... (> 46)

[STTL ]: Show subtitles............................................................................ (> 46)

= Transmission window

> TV operations..................................................................... (> 79)

Channel select/Change pages in the GUIDE Plus+ list

... (> 19, 21, 33)

@ Show timer recording list..................................................... (> 30)

A Input select (Tuner, AV1, AV2, AV3, DV) ................. (> 19, 28, 29)

B Create chapters................................................................... (> 37)

C Exit the menu screen

D Show the GUIDE Plus+ screen ............................... (> 19, 22, 33)

E Show FUNCTION MENU .................................................... (> 43)

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.

F Return to previous screen

G Skip approx. +60s ............................................................. (> 37)

H Skip approx. -10s .............................................................. (> 37)

I Skip the specified time ........................................................ (> 37)

Show menu for disc playback etc./Change DVB multi audio

........ (> 68)

Main Unit

VQT2J27

   

Disc tray The unit’s display



1 Standby/on switch (Í/I)..................... (> 13)

Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of power.

DV IN terminal (for a digital video camcorder)

.. (> 29)

3 SD card slot.............................................. (> 82)

4 USB port................................................... (> 82)





Pull to flip down the front panel.



Remote control signal sensor

5 AV3 input terminals .................................... (> 29)

6 Disc tray open/close buttons..................... (> 20)

7 Channel Select buttons ....................... (> 19, 21)

8 Start recording button................................ (> 21)

9 Stop button.......................................... (> 20, 21)

: Play/a1.3 button....................................... (> 20)

The Unit’s Display

HDD

DVD

 

HDD

DVD

USB

EXT

-L

REC

COPY

PLAY

 

STEP 1

1 Disc indicator

This indicator lights up when a disc is inserted.

2 Digital broadcast indicator

Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.

3 Copying indicator 4 USB port indicator 5 SD card slot indicator 6 Linked timer recordings with external equipment

indicator......................................................(> 28)

Rear Panel

RF IN

RF OUT

1 Aerial input terminal ...................... (> 10, 11, 80)

2 Aerial output terminal .................... (> 10, 11, 80)

3 AUDIO/VIDEO output terminals.......... (> 80, 81)

4 AV1 (TV) 21-pin Scart terminal ..... (> 10, 11, 80)

TV set connection

OUT

VIDEO

AUDIO

(EXT)

AV1 (TV)

AV2

7 Timer recording indicator .......................... (> 22)

On:

When a Timer recording programme is registered

Flashes:

When the unit cannot go to Timer recording standby

8 Drive [HDD, DVD or SD] indicator 9 Main display section

Current time/playback counter, various messages

: Remote control visual feedback

This flashes when it is operated by the remote control.

; Recording/Playback indicator

DMR-EX83EB-K

VQ7AA01002 R

SER. NO.

AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

AC IN

    

5 AV2 (EXT) 21-pin Scart terminal.......... (> 11 , 8 0)

Connection of an external unit

6 HDMI AV OUT terminal....................... (> 12, 81)

Digital audio and video output terminal

7 Digital audio output terminal ...................... (> 81)

8 Cooling fan 9 Serial number : AC IN~ = Power supply

Connection for the AC mains lead

21-pin Scart terminal

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

VQT2J27

Basic Connection

You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection > 12

Use of the RF coaxial cable

≥ Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables. ≥ Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.

Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

– You can use a variety of Q Link functions by connecting the unit to a Q Link compatible television (> 44). – You can enjoy high-quality viewing by connecting the unit to an RGB compatible television.

Make “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1” or “RGB 2” (> 77) Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (> 77)

≥ Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating

instructions. BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.

Connecting to a Television only

RF IN

To t h e aerial

HDMI IN

The RF coaxial cable cannot be used for showing pictures from the unit. The unit must be connected using another method, e.g. 21-pin Scart cable to show pictures from the unit on the television set.

RF IN

RF OUT

1 Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the unit. 2 RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN” on the TV. 3 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV.

AV1 (TV)

This unit

HDMI

AV OUT

HDMI cable

VQT2J27

Adding a Digital Satellite Receiver: Connecting to a Television and a Digital Satellite

You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection > 12

To household mains socket

Receiver

To t h e aerial

Digital satellite antenna

Digital satellite receiver

STEP 2

RF IN

DISH INPUT

RF OUT

The RF coaxial cable cannot be used for showing pictures from the unit. The unit must be connected using another method, e.g. 21-pin Scart cable to show pictures from the unit on the television set.

HDMI OUT

AV/TV

AV/VCR

RF IN

RF OUT

This unit

AV1(TV)

AV2 (EXT)

HDMI IN

HDMI AV OUT

HDMI cable

RF IN/AERIAL

1 Aerial cable to the “RF IN” on the digital satellite receiver. 2 RF coaxial cable from the “RF OUT” on the digital satellite receiver to the “RF IN” on the unit. 3 RF coaxial cable (included) from the “RF OUT” on the unit to the “RF IN/AERIAL” on the TV. 4 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/VC R ” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV2 (EX T) ” on the unit. 5 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV1 (TV)” on the unit to the “AV” on the TV. 6 21-pin Scart cable from the “AV/TV” on the digital satellite receiver to the “AV” on the TV.

To view digital satellite programmes

Refer to “Watching Digital Satellite Programmes” (> 19)

To record digital satellite programmes

Refer to “Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver” (> 28)

Connecting AC mains lead (included)

Connect only after all other connections are complete.

This unit

AC IN

When the unit is not to be used for a long time

To save power, unplug it from the household mains socket. This unit consumes a small amount of power, even when it is turned off.

[approx. 0.3 W (“Power Save in Standby” is

After completing the above connections, proceed to the TV Tuning (> 13).

activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)]

Additional Connections 110, 80

VQT2J27

Basic Connection

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following functions are available.

≥ Direct TV Recording (> 26) ≥ Watching Digital Satellite

Programmes (> 19)

(In this case, make sure to switch the television input to “AV”.)

≥ You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection to the 21-pin Scart cable connection

between this unit and your TV.

Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not included)

When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted, enabling you to enjoy high quality, digital video and audio with just one cable. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to 1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.

≥ This unit incorporates HDMI

gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV. A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.

≥ Video sources converted to 1920

image resolution than true, native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.

≥ Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover). ≥ When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function

(V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology that can reproduce greater colour

t1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective

When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible. [> 44, Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI Control

”/Q Link)]

≥ It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.

Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.

≥ Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

Digital Satellite receiver

HDMI OUT

AV/VCR

AV1(TV)

AV2 (EXT)

This unit

≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (> 75).

(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.) To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV and set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p” (> 77).

HDMI IN

HDMI

AVOUT

HDMI cable

21-pin Scart cable

Notes

≥If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed

(> 96) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed). ≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.

For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input

terminal (PC monitors, etc.):

Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio

cannot be output).

VQT2J27

Setting the Channels and Clock

Tips

To cancel Auto-Setup

Press [RETURN ].

If the unit displays “No stations found!”

Press [1] to select “No” and press [OK]. Go to step 2. After you have performed steps 2–;, turn off the unit and confirm the cable or aerial input is connected to the RF IN terminal. Restart the Auto-Setup again (> 73, DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality).

If the clock setting menu appears or the clock is not correct, set the clock manually (> 14).

Restarting the Auto-Setup (> 73, DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality)

To set the channel list best suited to your region (> 73, DVB Auto Setup by Region)

About the screen saver function

When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver may be displayed.You can turn this function off (> 76, Screen Saver).

TV’s remote control

DVB Auto Setup

Scan CH 21 68

Channel Name

RETURN

Searching...

BBC ONE Wales BBC 2W

27 27

Type TV TV

Quality 9 9

BBC NEWS 24

BBC Radio Wales

Radio

TV: 6 Radio: 4 Data: 0

Preparation:

≥ Turn on the mains for the television

(and connected equipment) and select the appropriate AV input to suit the connections to this unit.

≥ These are the first settings you make

upon buying the unit. You don’t need to make these settings again.

to turn the unit on.

DRIVE

SELECT

VOL

PROG/CHECK

STEP 3

PAGE

DVB Auto Setup starts. The unit will search for the digital terrestrial channels. This takes about 5 minutes.

Power Save in Standby

Function:

3, 4 to select “On”, “On

Timer” or “Off”, then

“On”: It will go into the

Power Save in Standby mode when the unit is in standby mode.

“On Timer”: Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to set the start and stop time

and then press [OK]. ≥“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during

the setting time period.

“Off”: It is possible to start quickly from the standby

mode. (Quick Start mode)

The features of the “Power Save in Standby” function when the unit is in standby mode are as below.

Power Save in Standby

Power consumption Quick Start*

Front display

Watching the picture from the digital satellite receiver connected to the AV2 terminal

§1

The unit could take over 1 minute to switch ON from standby mode with Quick start deactivated. This time could be reduced to less than 10 seconds with Quick start activated.

§2

When “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (> 78)

When setup has completed, the confirmation screen appears.

(On/On Timer)

Approx. 0.3W

(The clock display

Power Save in Standby

Power Save On

:00

Deactivated

CHANGE

Activated

From

Saves standby power consumption by disabling Quick Start function and AV2 loop-through in standby.

RETURN

(Off)

Approx. 12W

Deactivated

Turns off

Activated

Stays lit

disappears.)

Cannot do Can do

(continued on the next page)

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

:00

OPTION

REC

TEXT STTL

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

CHAPTER

INPUT SELECT

SLOW SEARCH

PLAYx1. 3

EXITSTATUS

RETURN

MANUAL SKIP

-10s +60s

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINKREC MODE

DISPLAY TIME SLIP

VQT2J27

Setting the Channels and Clock

The Owner ID settings screen appears.

1 and press the numbered buttons to enter your choice of a 4-digit PIN number.

Owner ID

PIN number

Name

House No.

Postcode

RETURN

RETURN : leave

≥ Make a note of the PIN number (don’t

forget). Owner ID cannot be reset by “Shipping Condition” in the setup menu. (> 78)

to store the PIN number.

2 to select “Yes”, then

The cursor moves to “Name”.

1 to enter the name.

3, 4 to select a letter, then 1 to

move to next character.

Repeat this to enter the name.

to store the name.

4 and 1 and then repeat steps 8, 9 to enter and store “House No.” and “Postcode”.

RETURN

;

The Owner ID settings screen disappears.

– Auto-Setup for your unit is complete. You

can now choose your favourite channels and store them in the required order in the Favourites. (> 72)



Clock Setting

This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a day. However, if the clock is not set correctly, you can set it manually as follows.

With the unit stopped

3, 4

3, 4 to select “

4 5

3, 4

3, 4 to select Automatic “Off”,

then

2, 1 to select the item you want

to select “Others”, then

to select “Setup”, then

Others

”, then 1

to select “Clock”, then

Clock

Time Date

0 : 00 : 00

Number

Please set clock manually.

CHANGE

SELECT

OK: store RETURN: leave

RETURN

Automatic

/ 1 / 2010

Off

to change.

The items change as follows:

Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year ^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J

3, 4 to change the setting.

You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.

to confirm new date and

time and to initiate the clock.

Tips

To correct the PIN number

1.Press [2, 1] to select the digit.

2.Press the numbered buttons to enter the digit.

To correct the character

1 Press [2, 1] to select the character. 2 Press [3, 4] to correct the character.

To display the Owner ID information on TV

Press and hold [∫] on the main unit for more than 5 seconds. The PIN number is not displayed. After 30 seconds this menu automatically disappears.

VQT2J27

RETURN

Tips

≥If the clock is set manually, the clock does not automatically correct

the time. We recommend you set “Automatic” in the Clock setting menu to “On” in step 6 (> above).

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

HDD and Disc Handling

Usable Discs for Recording and Playback

Disc type Logo

Hard disk

drive (HDD)

DVD-RAM

DVD-R

DVD-R DL Video – ≤≤ –

DVD-RW Video ≤≤ ≤ –

+R Video – ≤ –(4:3 aspect) –

+R DL Video – ≤ –(4:3 aspect) –

Data that can

be recorded

and played

Video

Still picture

Music

Video

Still picture

§3

Video

Still picture

§3

Rewritable

≤ – ≤≤ [HDD]

≤≤ ≤

Play on other

players

– ≤≤ –

Recording 16:9

§1

aspect picture

Copy-once recording

§2

(CPRM) (> 24)

CPRM (> 96)

compatible discs

Standard symbol

STEP 3

≤

[RAM]

only.

[-R] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation

(Video only)

[-R]DL] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation

[-RW‹V›] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation

[+R] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation

[+R]DL] before finalisation [DVD-V] after finalisation

+RW Video ≤≤–(4:3 aspect) – [+RW]

§1

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment (> 71). [RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and DVD-RAM compatible DVD players. [-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment compatible with these discs.

§2

For further information (> 24, Notes for Recording)

§3

[-R] Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc.

≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is

necessary (> 70).

≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend

you create top menu (> 71).

≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.

For available recording times for different discs under different recording modes, see “Recording Modes and Durations” (> 25).

≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent

you from playing or recording certain discs.

≥Please see specifications (> 98) for compatible disc versions and

recording speeds.

Notes

≥[RAM] will show an increase in available space whenever a title has

been erased.

≥[-RW‹V›] and [+RW] discs will only show an increase in available

space when their last title has been erased.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The discs will show no increase in available

space after deleting titles.

≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the

discs and you may not be able to play them due to the condition of the recording.

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is not enough space on the first layer to record a

DVD-R DL +R DL

When switching layers: Video and audio may momentarily cut

programme, the remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers.

Second recordable layer

The available space

First recordable layer

Titl e 1 Title 2

Playback direction

≤: Can do, –: Cannot do

∫Recording Modes and Durations (> 25)

(Inner section of the disc) (Outer section of the disc)

VQT2J27

HDD and Disc Handling

Play-only Discs

Disc type Logo Standard symbol Uses

DVD-Video [DVD-V] High quality movie and music discs

video recorded on another DVD recorder

and DVD-R DL§ with video recorded in DivX (> 18)

and DVD-R DL§ with music recorded in MP3/WMA (> 18)

and DVD-R DL§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG (> 18)

DVD-RW (DVD

Video

Recording

format)

DVD-R

DVD-R DL

[-RW‹VR›]

DivX

, MP3, WMA,

JPEG

DVD-RW ≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they

have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.

≥By formatting (> 70) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video

format.

≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for

recording.

≥DVD-R ≥DVD-R ≥DVD-R

[CD]

DivX, MP3, WMA,

JPEG

Video CD

[VCD]

SVCD

Play may be impossible on some DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R or CD-RW discs due to the condition of the recording.

≥You can play still pictures (JPEG), MP3 and WMA format data recorded on DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/RW. You can also play CD-DA, Video CD

and SVCD (conforming to IEC62107) format data recorded on CD-R/RW. Close the session or finalise the disc after recording.

≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating

instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.

Discs that Cannot be Played

≥ 2.6/5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm ≥ 3.95/4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring ≥ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on

another unit and not finalised (> 96).

≥ Discs recorded with AVCHD format ≥ DVD-Video with a region number other than “2” or “ALL ≥ DVD-Audio ≥ Blu-ray, HD DVD ≥ DVD-ROM, +R 8 cm, CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD,

CVD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD

≥ DVD-RAM with cartridge (TYPE1)

≥Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW

You can record tracks to this unit’s HDD.

and CD-RW§ with video recorded in DivX (> 18)

≥CD-R

and CD-RW§ with music recorded in MP3/WMA (> 18)

≥CD-R

and CD-RW§ with still pictures recorded in JPEG (> 18)

≥You can record tracks to this unit’s HDD.

≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW

Types of disc or title recorded on HDD for the type of connected TV

When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table. (≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)

TV type

Multi-system TV

Disc/Titles

recorded on

HDD

PAL ≤

NTSC ≤

)

Yes /N o

VQT2J27

PAL ≤

PAL TV

NTSC TV

§1

If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals the picture will not be shown correctly.

§2

Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 76).

≥When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that

you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or NTSC) (> 76).

NTSC

PAL –

NTSC

§1

≤

(PAL60)

§2

≤

USB Memory and Card Handling

Structure of folders

USB memories you can use on this unit

USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:

– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.

Compatible USB memories

Format

Standard symbol [USB]

Data that can be played or copied (> 18)

File format DivX MP3/WMA Still pictures (JPEG)

Playing

Copying to HDD

Instructions

DivX VOD contents recorded on USB memories cannot be played back. (> 39)

≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit. ≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device. ≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to

this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.

≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used. ≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported. ≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not

supported.

≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported. ≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.

FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.

≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported. ≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work. ≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.

(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)

≤

≤≤

– ≤≤

You can play DivX files recorded with a computer onto the USB memory (> 38).

You can play MP3/WMA files recorded with a computer onto the USB memory and copy them to HDD (> 39, 66).

You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto the USB memory and copy them to HDD, DVD-RAM or card (> 40, 65).

Cards Usable on this Unit

≥SD Memory Card§1 (from 8 MB to 2 GB) ≥SDHC Memory Card

Type

≥Multi Media Card

§1

Including miniSD Card and microSD Card

§2

Including miniSDHC Card and microSDHC Card

The card types mentioned above will be referred to as “SD card” in these operating instructions.

Standard symbol [SD]

Data that can be recorded

and played (> 18)

Instructions

Still pictures (JPEG) Video (SD Video)

You can insert directly into the SD card slot.

§1

A miniSD Card and a microSD Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.

§2

A miniSDHC Card and a microSDHC Card must be used with the adaptor that comes with the card.

≥You can play and copy still pictures taken on a digital camera etc. (> 40, 64). ≥SD Video shot with a Panasonic SD Video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or DVD-RAM (> 63) ≥SD Video cannot be played directly from the SD card.

Suitable SD cards

≥When using SD cards 4 GB or larger, only SD cards that display the SDHC

logo can be used.

≥Usable memory is slightly less than the card capacity. ≥Please confirm the latest information on the following website.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/ (This site is in English only.)

≥If the SD card is formatted on other equipment, the time necessary for

recording may be longer. Also, if the SD card is formatted on a PC, you may not be able to use it on this unit. In these cases, format the card on this unit (> 70, 96). Formatting the card on this unit will erase all data on the card.

≥This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card

Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format.

≥SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can only be used with

other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.

≥This unit cannot play MOTION JPEG and AVCHD format pictures on an SD

card.

≥We recommend using a Panasonic SD card. ≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing. ≥You cannot use SDXC Memory Card.

§2

(from 4 GB to 32 GB)

Card

DCIM

XXXXX

(Picture folder)

XXXX



001

Any folder with JPEG files

P0000001.JPG P0000002.JPG

SD_VIDEO

PRG

(MPEG2 folder)

MOV

 

MOV



PRG

MGR_INFO

(MPEG2 information folder)

.JPG

.MOD .MOI .PGI

: Numbers XXX: Letters

VQT2J27

DivX files, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)

e.g. Structure of MP3 folders

DivX File information

Playable media File format

Number of folders Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300

Number of files Support version Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile V3.0.

MP3/WMA File Information

Playable media [HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

File format MP3

Number of folders (groups or albums)

Number of files (tracks)

Bit rates (MP3) 32 kbps to 320 kbps

Sampling frequency (MP3)

ID3 tags WMA tags

For WMA This unit is compatible with Windows Media

Still Picture (JPEG§3) Information

Playable media [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]

File format JPEG

Compatible pixels Between 34k34 and 6400k6400

Number of

§4

folders

Number of files

MOTION JPEG PROGRESSIVE JPEG

≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within an MP3/WMA

file, play may not be possible.

[USB]

§2

Total number of recognizable file including MP3, WMA, JPEG, DivX and other type of files is 4000.

§3

It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.

§4

When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not display or be playable.

§4

DivX VOD contents cannot be played back.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

§1

DivX ≥Files must have the extension “.DIVX”, “.divx”,

“.AVI” or “.avi”.

folders (including the root folder)

§2

Maximum number of files recognizable

: 200 files

Video – Number of stream: Up to 1 – Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DX50 –16 k 16 to 720 k 576 (25 fps)

16 k 16 to 720 k 480 (30 fps)

– Aspect Ratio: 10:11, 40:33, 16:11, 12;11, 1:1 Audio – Number of stream: Up to 8 – Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital – Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG

multi is 2 ch conversion.

– Bitrate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps (MP3/MPEG), 32

kbps to 448 kbps (Dolby Digital)

– Sampling frequency: 16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/

32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz (MP3/MPEG)/32 kHz/

44.1 kHz/48 kHz (Dolby Digital)

≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”. WMA (Windows Media-formatted file) ≥Files must have the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.

Maximum number of folders (groups or albums) recognizable: 300 folders (groups or albums) (including the root folder)

Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable

§2

3000 files (tracks)

16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1 kHz/48 kHz

compatible ([HDD] [USB])

Audio 9 (WMA9).

≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.

(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0) [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders

recognizable: 300 folders [HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of 300 folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files recognizable

§2

: 3000 files

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000 files

Not supported

Notes

[HDD] [RAM] [SD]

≥Compatible formats: DCF§compliant (Content recorded on a digital

camera, etc.)

Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]

≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended

formats) and Joliet

≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-R

DL); however, reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a lot of sessions.

≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files

(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums); some files (tracks) may not display or be playable.

≥Images recorded at a very high resolution may take a long time to

display.

≥English alphabetical characters and Arabic numerals are displayed

correctly. Other characters may not display correctly.

≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is

displayed on a computer.

≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files (tracks)

and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order you number them.

≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format. ≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be played. ≥This unit is not compatible with copy-protected, Lossless,

Professional, Voice and Multiple Bit Rate (MBR) for WMA.

≥This unit is not compatible with WMA files protected with digital rights

management (DRM).

Tips

You can play music files (MP3/WMA) and still pictures (JPEG) on this unit by making folders as shown below. However depending on the method of writing data (writing software), play may not be in the order you number the folders.

Structure of MP3/WMA folders

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Prefix with 3-digit numbers in the order you want to play them. ≥The file name extension of WMA

files will be “.wma”.

Order of play

Structure of still pictures (folders)

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

Files inside a folder are displayed in the order they were updated or taken.

Order of play

[RAM]

Folders can be created on other equipment.

These folders cannot be selected as a copying destination.

If a folder name or file name has

≥

been input using other equipment, the name may not be displayed properly or you may not be able to play or edit the data.

Root

XXXX

JPEG

DCIM

Root

003 Group

Root



DCIM

XXXXX

001 Group

001

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

P0000001.jpg P0000002.jpg

DCIM

002 Folder

P0000003.jpg P0000004.jpg P0000005.jpg

004 Folder

P0000008.jpg P0000009.jpg

.jpg

XXXXX

XXXX

002 Group

001.mp3

002.mp3

003.mp3

004.mp3

XXXXX

XXXX

003 Folder

P0000006.jpg P0000007.jpg



.jpg



VQT2J27

Watching Television

Basic Operati ons

OPTION

RETURN

SLOW SEARCH

DRIVE

SELECT

PAGE

PROG CHECK

EXITSTATUS

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINKREC MODE

REC

TEXT STTL

DISPLAY TIME SLIP

SKIP

STOP

PAUSE

PLAYx1. 3

DELETE

INPUT

SELECT

VOL

CHAPTER

PAUSE LIVE TV

-10s +60s

MANUAL SKIP

INPUT

SELECT

Refer to “GUIDE Plus+ system” (> 33) for detail information. This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to directly receive and

record digital terrestrial channels.

Preparation:

≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the

connections to this unit.

Important:

This unit does not have an analogue broadcast tuner.

to turn the unit on.

Sun 10/10/09 19:45

– The GUIDE Plus+ list

appears.

SELECT

RETURN

3, 4

3, 4 to select “View”, then

Selecting a Channel without the GUIDE Plus+ system

to select the current programme, then

To select desired channel

Press [WXCH].

To directly enter Channels

You can also select channels with the numbered buttons. e.g., “5”: [0] > [0] > [5] or [5] > [OK]

“15”: [0] > [1] > [5] or [1] >[5] > [OK]

Tips

≥Regarding Digital Channel Information (> 46) ≥If New Channel Message appears (> 47) ≥To select Audio Description, Digital Teletext and subtitles (> 46) ≥To change DVB Multi Audio (> 69, DVB Multi Audio)

Notes

≥The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed immediately after initial tuning is done.

TV Guide:

Landscape

Sun 10th

Emmerdale

Time: BBC 1 BBC 2

Channel 4 Channel 5

+24 hours

OPTION: Select Advert, etc.

info

Change Display Mode

Guide

All Types

: In today’s show we will...

Prog. Type

All Channels

Category

Page Page

Watching Digital Satellite Programmes

You can view the digital satellite programmes via this unit by the following method when “Power Save in Standby” is activated, and the digital satellite receiver is not connected to TV.

Preparation:

≥ Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2 input terminals

(> 11).

≥ Turn on the digital satellite receiver. ≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the

connections to this unit.

to turn the unit on.

to select “AV2”.

Tips

≥When “Power Save in Standby” is

deactivated (> 78), you can watch the digital satellite programme without turning the unit on.

Notes

≥You cannot watch digital satellite

programmes during timer recording.

VQT2J27

Playback

OPTION

RETURN

SLOW SEARCH

DRIVE

SELECT

PAGE

CHAPTER

PROG/CHECK

EXITSTATUS

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINKREC MODE

REC

SKIP

STOP

PAUSE

PLAYx1. 3

DELETE

INPUT

SELECT

VOL

PAUSE LIVE TV

-10s +60s

MANUAL SKIP

OKOK

PLAYx1. 3

DRIVE

SELECT

Tips

To return to the menu screen

[DVD-V]

1.Press [OPTION].

2.Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].

[VCD]

Press [RETURN ].

Notes

≥[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Playback starts from the most recent recording.

≥[DVD-V] [VCD]

Playback starts from the point specified by the disc.

≥[CD]

Playback starts from the beginning of the disc.

≥Depending on the disc type, playing may

automatically start without pressing [1](PLAY).

≥The unit takes some time to read the disc

before play starts.

≥DISCS CONTINUE TO ROTATE WHILE

MENUS ARE DISPLAYED. Press [∫] when you finish to preserve the unit’s motor and your television screen.

≥If “$” appears on the TV, the operation is

prohibited by the unit or disc.

Preparation:

≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the

connections to this unit.

Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs

Refer to “Advanced Playback” (> 36–37) for detail information. [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL ] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] [CD]

DRIVE

SELECT

If you selected the DVD drive

to turn the unit on.

to select the HDD or DVD drive.

OPEN/CLOSE

to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).

– Insert a disc (> 82) and press [< OPEN/CLOSE] again to close

the tray.

PLAYx1. 3

Stopping Play

Press [∫]. – The stopped position is memorized. (Resume play function) – (Expect for [HDD]) The stopped position is cleared when you press [∫]

several times.

Pausing Play

Press [;]. – Press again to restart play.

Menu Screens on the TV

[DVD-V] [VCD]

Generally, menu screens that appear on the TV may be navigated as follows: e. g.,

DVD TOP MENU

Chapter List

[DVD-V]

3, 4, 2, 1 to select an item, then

You can sometimes use the numbered buttons to select an item.

[VCD]

Press the numbered buttons to select an item.

e.g., “5”: > , “15”: >

Play

Subtitles

Trail er

DINOSAUR

VQT2J27

Recording Television Programmes

Notes

≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [-R] [+RW] To use a new disc,

formatting is necessary. (> 26, 70)

≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30

seconds for the unit to complete recording management information after recording finishes.

≥You cannot change the channel or

recording mode during recording.

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to

discs that already have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥[-R] Video cannot be recorded to DVD-R

discs with JPEG images already recorded on them.

≥Depending on the type of disc used for

recording or the type of broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to record. (> 24)

HDDHDD

47:47

95:34

191:11

381:16

Recording Mode

Rec Mode Remain

HDD

Elapsed recording time

Refer to “Notes for Recording” (> 24) and “Advanced Recording” (> 25–

27) for detail information on recording. [HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+ R] [+ RW]

Preparation:

≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the

connections to this unit.

≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 70).

DRIVE

SELECT

VOL

PAGE

DRIVE

SELECT

[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] If you selected the DVD drive

to turn the unit on.

to select the HDD or DVD drive.

OPEN/CLOSE

to open the tray (Button located on front of the unit).

– Insert a disc with enough remaining blank space and press

[< OPEN/CLOSE] again to close the tray.

– When the format confirmation screen is displayed (> 26).

to select desired channel.

– To select with the numbered buttons (> 19). – When no channel setting is performed on the

unit and broadcast is recorded directly from the digital satellite receiver, select a channel on the connected equipment, then press [INPUT SELECT] to select “AV2”.

REC MODE

mode. (> 25)

to select the recording

DELETE

SKIP

STOP

OPTION

REC

TEXT STTL

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW SEARCH

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

MANUAL SKIP

-10s +60s

REC MODE

EXT LINKREC MODE

DISPLAY TIME SLIP

PROG/CHECK

CHAPTER

PLAYx1. 3

EXITSTATUS

RETURN

DIRECT TV REC

REC

to start recording.

HDD

Pausing Recording

Press [;].

– Press again to restart recording.(The title is not divided.)

Stopping Recording

Press [∫].

Tips

≥If a programme to record has subtitles, Audio Description or multiple audio, you can record

with these items. They cannot be switched after recording.

– To record with subtitles

Before starting the recording, show the subtitles (> 46). If the programme has multiple subtitle, select the desired language (> 73).

– To record with Audio Description

Before starting the recording, turn on the Audio Description and set the volume (> 46).

– To record with the selected audio

Before starting the recording, select the desired audio channel or language, if the programme has multiple audio channel or language (> 69, 73).

≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode only):

Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 75)

REC

VQT2J27

Timer Recording

Tips

≥To check programmes (> 31) ≥To cancel a timer recording

programming

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

programme (the timer icon is displayed) and press [OK].

2 While “Delete” is selected, press

[OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and

press [OK]. – The timer icon disappears.

≥To record sound using LPCM (XP mode

only): Set the “Audio Mode for XP Recording” to “LPCM” in the Setup menu (> 75)

Notes

≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new disc,

formatting is necessary.(> 26, 70)

≥The GUIDE Plus+ list is not displayed

immediately after initial tuning is done.

≥The GUIDE Plus+ system will not work if

the clock is not set correctly.

≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV

System” (> 76), the GUIDE Plus+ system cannot be used.

≥“FR” recording mode is not available when

the timer programme is controlled by “Guide Link”.

≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system

data is only possible via the aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the TV Guide data via externally connected satellite receivers is not possible.

≥If you set a timer recording that will overlap

with other timer recordings, the “Overlapped Timer Recording” screen appears to help you resolve the overlapping. Follow the on-screen instructions.

≥Simultanious recording to HDD and DVD

is not possible.

Timer icon

What is FREEVIEW+TM?

FREEVIEW+ is the functions that enable timer recordings to be controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. “Guide Link”, “Series recording” (> 34), and “Split Programme” are available.

“Guide Link” – If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop times can be controlled by the broadcaster, e.g. delayed start. This is indicated by “Guide Link” in the Timer Recording screen in step 2 (> below).

“Split Programme” – If a programme is separated into 2 or more parts by some other programmes e.g. news, this unit pauses recording during the gap. This is indicated by “Split” in the Timer Recording screen in step 2 (> below). When setting timer from the 1st split programme, other parts of the programme will be automatically set and indicated by the timer mark on the TV Guide, but not shown on the timer recording list.

If you set a timer recording from the TV Guide, the recording’s start and stop times are controlled by the signal sent from the broadcaster. If the signal is not sent correctly, the recording may lack the beginning or the ending part of the programmes. In order to make the timer recording work successfully, we recommend you set the start time earlier and the end time later by some minutes, up to a maximum of 10 minutes for Guide Link to function. e.g. When you set the timer recording for a programme that will start at 10:00 and end at 11:00, set “9:58” and “11:05” in step 3 (> below).

DRIVE

SELECT

DELETE

SKIP

VOL

PAGE

PROG/CHECK

CHAPTER

INPUT

SELECT

SLOW SEARCH

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

Preparation:

≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the

connections to this unit.

≥ Turn on this unit. ≥ If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you use for recording (> 15). ≥ [RA M] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 70). ≥ Confirm that the clock on the unit’s display is set to the correct time.

– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the future programme,

then

VQT2J27

Sun 10/10/10 19:45

-24

– If “Selection Screen” appears, press [3, 4] to select “Single Timer Rec.”, then

Confirm the programme (start and end time) by TV magazine, etc. and correct if necessary using

3, 4, 2, 1 then

– The settings are stored and the timer programme is on. – The timer icon is displayed. –“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been

– Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings. –Press [Í] to turn the unit off.

≥

“Guide Link” will not be displayed and will not function under the following conditions. – Timer programmes set manually (> 30). – Timer programmes set from the TV Guide are modified or start/stop time

(Series): Series recording (> 34) is set. (Split): The programme is split in two or more parts by other programmes. This

TV Guide:

Landscape

Sun 10th

2 BBC 2

Holiday Programme

Time: BBC 1 BBC 2

Channel 4 Channel 5

+24

TIMER REC

RETURN

hours

OPTION: Select Advert, etc.

info

Change Display Mode

Guide

hours

press [OK]. Refer to “Series recording” (> 34) for “Series Timer Rec.”.

activated.

changed by more than 10 minutes from original time.

unit pauses recording during the gap between the parts of the programme.

Prog. Type

All Types

Start

20:30



HDD Remain

DELETE

30:24 SP

Stop

22:30

Single Timer Rec Series Timer Rec

DVD

SUN 10/10/10 19:45:00

HDD

ModeSPSTTL

View

DVD

HDD

Delete

Programme Name

Series Info

0 9

All

Channels

Category

Timer Recording

TUE 14.10.08 12:54:00

Page Page

Selection screen

Date

Channel

The West Tonight

2 BBC 2

10/10 SUN

3 TV

All Channels : BBC 2

News & Factual

Holiday Programme

TUE 14.10.08

(Guide Link)

18:00࡯18:30

Press OK to store the programme.

RETURN

“Guide Link”, “Split” and “Series” are displayed here.



1:58 SP

OFF

Number

STOP

OPTION

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

PLAYx1. 3

OKOK

MANUAL SKIP

-10s +60s

EXITSTATUS

RETURN

Deleting Titles

OPTION

RETURN

SLOW SEARCH

DRIVE

SELECT

PAGE

CHAPTER

PROG/CHECK

EXITSTATUS

DIRECT TV REC

EXT LINKREC MODE

REC

SKIP

STOP

PAUSE

PLAYx1. 3

DELETE

INPUT

SELECT

VOL

PAUSE LIVE TV

-10s +60s

MANUAL SKIP

OKOK

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

DELETE

DRIVE

SELECT

Notes

≥You cannot delete while recording or

copying.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Even if you have set

protection on other equipment, such titles are deleted.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] [-RW‹V›]It is not

possible to delete contents from finalised discs.

Tips

≥[HDD] [RAM] Deleting an item increases the

available disc space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.

≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available disc space

does not increase after deletion.

≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space

increases when you delete the last title.

≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover total

disc space, the disc needs to be formatted. (> 70)

≥[HDD] You can press [STATUS ] to

display the “Properties” screen when a title with “ Info” on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected. (> 51)

Preparation:

≥ Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to suit the

connections to this unit.

≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection (> 70). ≥ If deleting titles from a disc, insert the disc containing the programme to

be deleted.

Important:

Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

DELETE Navigator

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [ -RW ‹V›] [+ R] [+ R]DL] [+RW]

DRIVE SELECT

With the unit stopped

3, 4 to select “Delete”, then

3, 4 to select “Video”, then

HDD

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the title, then

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. Press [;] again to cancel.

to select the HDD or DVD drive.

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others Drive Select

RETURN

Remain 30:00 SP

Video

Picture Music

DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles

HDD

10/10

11/10

DolphinsChantal Show

Page 02/02

RETURN

OPTION

Select Info

VIDEO

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others Drive Select

MUSIC

PICTURE

Remain

Video Picture Music

RETURN

PAUSE

PAUSE LIVE TV

30:00 SP

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. ≥You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

2 to select “Delete”, then

Deleting Titles During Playback

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [ -RW ‹V›] [+ R] [+ R]DL] [+RW]

During playback

DELETE

2 to select “Delete”, then

VQT2J27

Notes for Recording

Advanc ed Featur es

Select the audio that you want to record in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen display (> 69).

–—



[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only. [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

12 cm

(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)

[HDD]

Broadcast in multi-channel sound:

Selecting audio for recording

You can select audio language when received audio in multichannel broadcast (“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of digital channel information display). However, audio cannot be switched after recording.

Hello Hola

Hallo

About the aspect when recording a programme

When you want to copy titles in high speed mode from the HDD to DVD-R, etc.

[HDD] [RAM] (When “Recording Format” is set to “Video format”) [-R] [-RW‹V›]

The original aspect used for the source programme will also be used with the recording.

[HDD] [RAM] (When “Recording Format” is set to “VR format”) The programme will be recorded in the original

aspect. However, in the following case, programme will be recorded in 4:3.

≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR (recordings

[+R] [+RW]

The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V ›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before recording to the HDD. (The default setting is “Video format”. > 74)

You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X necessary before recording to the HDD.

Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.

Record to the HDD

); however, the audio and aspect settings (> above) are

High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.

HDD

In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode ≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect ≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or 8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (> 96) compatible DVD-RAM.

Copy-once recording

≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are

deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.

≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard. ≥You cannot copy a Playlist (Video) created from “One time only recording” titles.

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V ›] [+R] [+R]DL]

The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (> 71).

It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them in the same way as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record

or copy.

You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

Playing the disc on other

Record to DVD-R, etc.

DVD players

[+RW]

If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 71). However, even with Top Menu, +RW may not play on other players.

Recording to DVD-R DL

VQT2J27

and +R DL

≥It is not possible to record to both HDD (Hard Disk Drive) and DVD drive simultaneously.

You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

CHG

C IN 9 V

OPEN

D N OU R

UR S

E OR MOD T

MONI

CTURE MODE I

Finalise

–—

Play on other DVD equipment

EARCH S

NTER E

L O

V Y PL A S I

D U EN T OP M

URN

E R

OFF

T A

2 3 4 5

 /I 

DOUBLE RE-MASTER

CD SEQUENTIAL

/   / 

DISC

DISC EXCHANGE DISC SKIP



OPEN / CLOSE

Advanced Recording

Recording Modes and Durations

Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated. (The times provided on this table are an estimate.)

DVD-RAM DVD-R

Recording

Mode

HDD

(250 GB)

Single-sided

(4.7 GB)

Double-

§1

sided

(9.4 GB)

DVD-RW

+RW

(4.7 GB)

DVD-R DL

(8.5 GB)

§3

+R DL (8.5 GB)

XP (High quality)

SP (Standard play)

LP (Long play)

55 hours 1 hour 2 hours 1 hour

110 hours 2 hours 4 hours 2 hours

221 hours 4 hours 8 hours 4 hours

EP (Extra long

§4

play)

441 hours

(331

hours§2)

8 (6

§2

) hours

FR (Flexible Recording)

§1

It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.

§2

When “Recording time in EP mode” has been set to “EP ( 6hours )” in the Setup menu (> 74). The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6hours )” than when using “EP ( 8hours )”.

§3

You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying. [+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

§4

When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs.

§4

EP (6hours)

EP (8hours)

441 hours maximum

8 hours

maximum

§2

16 (12

hours

16 hours

maximum

1 hour 45

minutes

3 hours 35

minutes

7 hours 10

mininutes

1 hour 45

minutes

3 hours 35

minutes

7 hours 10

minutes

14 hours 20

)

8 (6

§2

) hours

minutes

(10 hours 45

minutes

§2

)

Approximately

8 hours

maximum

14 hours 20

minutes

9 hours with

video quality

equivalent to LP

mode.

Tips

≥Maximum number of titles to a disc

[HDD] 499 titles on HDD [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] 99 titles on a disc [+R] [+RW] 49 titles on a disc

≥FR (Flexible recording mode)

Using “Flexible Recording” is convenient in these kinds of situations: [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] – When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an

appropriate recording mode difficult

– When you want to record a long programme with the best picture

quality possible

[HDD]

– When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be copied

to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording mode when copying, to fit the disc space

e.g., Recording a 90-minute programme to 4.7 GB DVD-RAM disc:

− If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit on one disc.

A second disc is necessary for 30-minutes of the programme.

Notes

≥This unit uses variable bit rate (VBR) recording which varies the

amount of data recorded to suit the picture quality, so actual recording times and remaining recording times shown by the unit will be different. ([-R]DL] [+R]DL] The difference will be especially noticeable.) Use a disc enough remaining blank space.

≥When recording to DVD-RAM using EP ( 8hours ) mode, play may not

be possible on DVD players, even if they are compatible with DVDRAM. In this case use EP ( 6hours ) mode.

− If you select SP mode, the programme will fit on one disc.

However there will be 30-minutes remaining disc space.

− If you select “Flexible Recording” the programme will fit on one disc perfectly.

You can set FR mode when programming timer recordings and flexible recording (> 27).

VQT2J27

Advanced Recording

REC

When the format confirmation screen is displayed

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVDRAM recordable on recording equipment.

Important:

Formatting permanently deletes all disc contents (including the contents that have been recorded on a PC), regardless of protection status of disc.

[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

The following screen may appear when inserting a new disc or a disc that has been recorded on another equipment.

Only format the disc if you intend to use it for recording.

SELECT

OK RETURN

Do not format if you intend to view pre-recorded titles or contents from the disc.

2 to select “Yes”, then

Tips

Refer to “Formatting Discs or Cards” (> 70) for more detail of formatting.

Specifying the Recording Time —One Touch Recording

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] This function allows specifying the length of recording time up to 4 hours.

During recording On the main unit only

repeatedly until the desired time

is reached.

– The recording time and the unit’s display changes as

follows: Counter (Cancel) __#OFF0:30__#OFF1:00

: v

OFF4:00 OFF1:30

^___ OFF3:00 (_ OFF2:00 (_--b

Notes

≥This function does not work during timer recording or Flexible

Recording.

≥Recording stops and the set time is cleared if you press [∫]. ≥This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not operated for

approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording, if “Auto Standby after OTR” is set to “On” in the Setup menu. (Default setting: “On”) (> 78)

When removing a Recorded or Copied Disc

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+ R]D L] After recording or copying, if you press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to eject the disc, the following

Finalise the disc so that it can be played on other DVD players. Note : Recording or Editing is not possible after finalising. This may take up to min.

screen may appear.

Finalising

DVD-R, etc. recorded or copied on this unit cannot be played on other players immediately after recording or copying. Using the Finalise feature allows you to play these discs on other players. Once the disc is Finalised you will no longer be able to record onto the disc. [However if you format the DVD-RW, you can record and copy onto the disc again. (> 70)]

Finalise

Press the REC button to start finalise.

Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit. This disc cannot be played on other DVD players without finalising.

to start finalising.

OPEN/CLOSE

to eject the disc without

finalising.

Direct TV Recording

[HDD]

This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV without having to change the channels on this unit.

You can use the function when you connect the unit to a Q Link compatible TV using a 21-pin Scart cable.

You can also use this function using VIERA Link. (> 44)

DIRECT TV REC

Press and hold for about 1

second.

– The titles are recorded to the HDD.

Tips

To stop recording

Press [∫].

Notes

≥When the Digital Teletext (> 46) is displayed, Direct TV recording is

unavailable.

≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV recording, the Direct

TV recording stops.

≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 28), Direct TV recording

is unavailable.

Notes

≥You cannot stop finalising once you have started it.

Tips

≥If you want to provide the disc with a name or set play menu select,

select “Disc Name” (> 70), “Auto-Play Select” (> 71) or “Top Menu” (> 71) in “DVD Management” before finalising.

≥Refer to “Finalising” (> 71) for more detail of finalising.

VQT2J27

Flexible Recording

Remaining time

Playing while you are recording

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the programme within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR mode. Refer to “FR (Flexible recording mode)” (> 25).

Preparation:

≥ Select the channel or the external input to record. ≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD

drive.

With the unit stopped

3, 4 to select “Others”, then

3, 4 to select “Flexible Rec”, then

Flexible Rec

Record in FR mode.

Maximum rec. time 8 hour 00 min.

Set rec. time

Start Cancel

SELECT

8 hour 00 min.

RETURN

Chasing Playback

[HDD] [RAM] Allows playback from the beginning of the title you are recording.

During recording

PLAYx1. 3

Tips

To stop play

Press [∫] once.

To stop recording

2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].

To stop timer recording

2 seconds after play stops,

1 Press [∫]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording”, then press [OK].

Simultaneous Record and Playback

[HDD] [RAM] Allows playback of a previous title, while recording something else.

≥ You can also change the drive and play while

recording. Press [DRIVE SELECT].

During recording

2, 1 to select “hour” and “min.”

and 3, 4 to set the recording time.

– You can set “hour” and “min.” using the

numbered buttons.

When you want to start recording

3, 4, 2, 1 to select “Start”, then

– Recording starts.

Notes

≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.

Tips

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

To stop recording partway

Press [∫].

To show the remaining recording time

Press [STATUS ] to show the remaining recording time.

HDD

REC 0:59

1 DVB

BBC ONE Wales

[3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title to

play, then

Tips

To stop play

Press [∫].

To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To stop recording

After play stops

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit the screen. 2 Press [∫]. 3

If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press [2,1] to select “Yes” or “Stop Recording” and press [OK] to stop recording.

Notes

≥During playing while you are recording, you cannot edit or delete titles.

VQT2J27

Recording from a Digital Satellite Receiver

INPUT

SELECT

DRIVE

SELECT

DRIVE

SELECT

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

Manual Recording

Preparation:

≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection

(> 70).

≥ Connect a digital satellite receiver to this unit’s AV2

input terminals (> 11) .

≥ Set the “AV2 Input” to match the connected

equipment in the Setup menu (> 77).

≥ When the output signal from the external equipment

is NTSC, change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 76).

With the unit stopped

to select “AV2” for the digital

satellite receiver you have connected.

Linked timer recordings with external equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK

To record programmes from a SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver using timer programming

Preparation:

≥ [RAM] If the disc is protected, release protection

(> 70).

≥ Make sure you connect the AV2 terminal of this unit to

“VCR Scart Terminal” of a SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver with a 21-pin scart cable (> 11) .

≥ Set the “AV2 Input” and “Ext Link” to match the

connected equipment in the Setup menu (> 77).

Make timer programming on SKY

Digital STB/digital satellite receiver.

– Refer to the equipment’s operating

instructions.

to select the HDD or DVD

drive.

– If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc

(> 82).

REC MODE

mode.

Select the channel on the digital

satellite receiver.

Tips

To skip unwanted parts

Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)

To stop recording

Press [∫].

Notes

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have PAL

signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD).

REC

to select the recording

to start recording.

to select the HDD or DVD

drive.

– If you selected the DVD drive, insert a disc

(> 82).

EXT LINK

– The unit turns off and “EXT-L” lights on the

unit’s display to indicate timer recording standby has been activated.

– While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or

recording, most operations on this unit are prohibited ([< OPEN/CLOSE], [Í/I] etc.).

Tips

To cancel the external control

Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or to cancel linked timer recording standby (The unit turns on and “EXT-L” disappears.).

Manual timer recordings (> 30)

Notes

≥In order to prevent accidental operation, press [EXT LINK] to cancel

the setting after recording is finished.

≥This function does not work when “TV System” is set to “NTSC” in the

Setup menu (> 76).

≥This function does not work with some equipment. Refer to the

equipment’s operating instructions.

≥The beginnings of recordings may not be recorded correctly in some

cases.

≥.When “Ext Link” is set to “Ext Link 2”, this function does not work if

the input signal is NTSC system.

≥Programmes are recorded as one title on this unit when the end time

of the earlier timer recording and the start time of the later timer recording are close to each other. [HDD] [RAM] To divide the titles, go to “Divide Title” (> 49).

≥When this unit is in EXT LINK standby (“EXT-L” is shown on the unit’s

display), the TV Guide cannot be downloaded.

≥While the unit is in EXT LINK standby mode or recording, AV1 output

terminal outputs the signal which is input from the AV2 input terminal irrespective of “AV1 Output” setting (> 77).

≥During EXT LINK standby mode or recording, playback is only

available from the drive performing the recording.

≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display, Direct TV Recording is

unavailable.

VQT2J27

Recording from an External Device

Audio/video cable

4-pin DV cable

Category

Broadcast date

Landscape view

TV Guide:

TIMER REC

RETURN

Sun 10th

10 Channel 4+1

BBC 1 BBC 2

Channel 4 Channel 5

+24 hours-24 hours

OPTION: Select Advert, etc.

info

Sun 10/10/10 19:45

Landscape

Time:

Guide

Selected programme

Sun 10/10/10 19:45

Portrait view

Using the GUIDE Plus+ list

To change channels Landscape view

To view a programme list for another day

To change the page of the GUIDE Plus+ list

To see programme information (programme name, programme duration, broadcast time, description, etc.)

(Programmes with the symbol)

To return to the previous screen

To exit the screen Press [EXIT].

Press [3, 4] to select a channel.

Portrait view

Press [2, 1] to select a channel. The GUIDE Plus+ list appears for this channel.

≥Jump ahead 24 hours

Press the “Green” button to jump ahead by one day.

≥Jump back 24 hours

Press the “Red” button. You can only jump back to the current date. Past information cannot be viewed.

Press [WXCH].

Press [STATUS ]. ≥Press [3] and [4] to scroll up and

down.

To show other pages

Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).

To return to the GUIDE Plus+ list

Press [STATUS ].

Press [RETURN ].

Notes

≥The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ system data is only possible via the

aerial input of this unit. The receipt of the GUIDE Plus+ data via externally connected digital satellite receivers is not possible.

≥The GUIDE Plus+ system setup will not work if the clock is not set

correctly or the wrong postcode is selected.

Page Page

-24 hours

The Gemstar branding partner will supply the rating information in the programme information and the recommended group in the Prog.Type list.

TV Guide: Portrait

Sun 10th 10 Channel 4+1

Channel 4 More 4 ITV 4 E4

19:30 20 20:00 21

00 22 22:00 23:00 23:0

0 00:05 00:05 00 00:10 01:00

+24 hours

OPTION: Select Advert, etc.

TIMER REC

info

RETURN

Guide

All Types

Hollyoaks

Channel 4 News

How to Look Good Naked The Secret Millionaire Love Trap

3 Minute Wonder Trial and Error

Prog. Type

Change Display Mode

View advertisement

Enter your postcode when using this function for the first time (> 78, Post Code) and leave the unit in standby over night to capture the information. If you have already entered your postcode in Owner ID (> 13), you do not have to enter again. If you enter an incorrect postcode for your area, or no postcodes are entered, advertisement may not be displayed correctly.

To display advertisement information

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Advert”, then press [OK].

While the advertisement information is not captured, “Enter Words” screen is displayed. (> 35, Searching by entering words)

≥To display the latest advertisement, you will need to update the

information.

≥To update the information continuously, this unit must be left in

standby mode over night.

To change advertisements

Press [3, 4].

To return to TV Guide

Press [RETURN ].

Notes

≥Some advertisements are for future programmes and you can set the

timer recording of the programmes using the advertisement screen. Follow the on-screen instructions.

≥The information from the GUIDE Plus+ system will not be lost even if

the unit is turned off at the mains outlet.

Tips

When the unit displays “No Data” or the empty GUIDE Plus+ list:

RadioTimes

All Channels

Category

Page Page

Landscape view:

The GUIDE Plus+ system offers detailed information as if you see a TV programme magazine. This is convenient to check the status of Timer recording.

Portrait view:

This is convenient to narrow down channels to search for the programme you want to watch.

To switch between Landscape view and Portrait view

Press [GUIDE].

≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.

Set the timer recording manually (> 30, Manual timer recordings).

VQT2J27

GUIDE Plus+ system

Series recording icon

Typ e Ca teg ory

(Yellow)

(Blue)

Series recording

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] You can record all the episodes of a series by setting just one timer recording using the GUIDE Plus+ system.

– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the series

programme, then

3, 4 to select “Series Timer

Rec.”, then

– If the same episode has already been set for

series timer recording at a different time or on another channel, “Series Timer Rec.” will not be selectable.

Selection Screen

Sun 10/10/10 12:54

Holiday Programme

2 BBC 2 News Sun 10/10/10 20:30࡯22:30

RETURN

– You cannot change “Channel” and “Date”.With

“Start” and “Stop” automatically set by the “Guide Link” function, “Start” can be changed back by up to 10 minutes and “Stop”can be changed forward by up to 10 minutes.

– This unit automatically records the

programmes that are identified to be of the same series by the GUIDE Plus+ data.

– Titles recorded using series recording are

bundled and displayed as a “group” in the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 36) except when using Auto Renewal Recording.

[S]

View

Single Timer Rec.

Series Timer Rec.

Delete

Series Info

Timer Recording

Date

Channel

2 BBC 2

18/ 8 TUE

All Channels : BBC 2 Holiday Programme (Guide Link) (Series)

Press OK to store the programme.

RETURN

1:58 SP

30:24 SP

DVD

HDD Remain

SUN 10/10/10 12:54:00

HDD

Start

ModeSPSTTL

Stop

RENEW

DVD

OFF

HDD

OFF

Programme Name

20:30

22:30



DELETE

Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or category

This function lets you display a GUIDE Plus+ list sorted by programme type (e.g. Movie, Sport) or category (e.g. Free Channels, Radio).

– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

to display the

list of programme type.

to display the

list of categories. 3, 4 to select the desired item.

3 4

– A list appears with all programmes of the

selected item.

– When you select the landscape view, the

programmes that belong to the selected programme type are highlighted.

TV Guide:

Landscape

SELECT

RETURN

Sun 10th

Time: BBC 1 BBC 2

Channel 4 Channel 5

+24 hours

OPTION: Select Advert, etc.

info

Guide

Sun 10/10/10 19:45

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the

News

Emmerdale

: In today’s show we will...

Prog. Type

Change Display Mode

programme.

After searching > 35, Tips in “Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD”

All Channels



Category

Page

All Types

All Types Movie News Entertainment

Sport Children’s Education Lifestyle Drama

e. g., Programme type, “News” is selected in step 3 of Landscape view.

All Channels

All Channels Free Channels Radio Data

Favourite 1 Favourite 2 Favourite 3 Favourite 4

Tips

To check the schedule of the series

Press the “Blue” button after performing steps 1 – 2 (> above).

Sun 10/10/10 10:35

Name

BBC2



BBC2

: The episode to be recorded

: Repeat programme

Notes

≥“Series Timer Rec.” will only be available when broadcaster is sending

series link information.

≥If the unit cannot record the first run, the unit will record the repeat

programme if it is available. However, this unit will not record the

repeat programme, if any part of the first run is recorded.

VQT2J27

≥The series recording will be cancelled if there has been no

episode of the series for 13 weeks.

Series Information

Date Contents

10/10 Sun

Decameron 1

21:30-22:30

25/08 Tue

Decameron 2

21:30-22:30

01/09 Tue

Decameron 3

21:30-22:30

08/09 Tue

Decameron 4

21:30-22:30

15/09 Tue

Decameron 1

21:30-22:30

Notes

≥The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas. This

function does not work properly unless the information which distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from broadcast stations is correct.

≥The programme list is available immediately if this unit has found a

digital station and loaded the information in the memory. This process can take a while depending on the particular station.

≥The programme list data are continuously downloaded in the

background when the unit is turned on. That means that the programme list can sometimes change while you are looking at it.

Tips

To return to the previous GUIDE Plus+ list before you have selected the programme type or categories

Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the categories in step 3.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

(> above)

Searching for the programme from the

Free Word Search

Simplified Search Detailed Search

TV Guide: Portrait

Sun 10/10/10 19:45

Sun 10th

11 SKY THREE

SKY THRE Premier R Virgin Radi Clyde 1

The Dog Whispe... The Dog Whispe... The Dog Whispe...

Search results for “Dog”

30 20

22:00 22

19:30 20

Thu 20th

Fri 21st

GUIDE Plus+ list

Searching by entering words

By entering words, you can search for programmes from the GUIDE Plus+ list using the programme information.

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

During play or while stopped

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10/10

11/10

DolphinsChantal Show

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

– The GUIDE Plus+ list appears.

OPTION

3, 4 to select “Free Word

Search”, then

Enter the word you would like to

search for, then

Entry method > 47, Entering Text

3, 4 to select “Simplified Search”

or “Detailed Search”, then

Simplified Search:

It searches the programme names only.

Detailed Search:

It searches all the information on the programmes. It might take more time to search the desired programme.

STOP

Detailed Search may result in many hits, but search time will be longer.

Select Advert

Free Word Search

OPTION

RETURN

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

3, 4, 2, 1 to select a title, then

OPTION

3, 4 to select “TV Guide

Explorer”, then

3, 4 to select “Series

Timer Rec” or “Find Titles”, then

– When “Series Timer Rec” is selected

Go to step 4 of “Series recording” (> 34)

– When “Find Titles” is selected

Go to step 5 (> below)

STOP

– When searching using a word other than the title

name, enter a different word. (> 47, Entering Text)

3, 4 to select “Simplified Search”

or “Detailed Search”, then

Page 02/02

Select

Info

Series Timer Rec

Find Titles

-24 hours

Prog. Type

Search results appear.

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the

programme.

After searching > right, Tips in “Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD”

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ]. It may return to the GUIDE Plus+ screen.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD

[HDD]

You can search for programmes using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD. Also, if you select “Series Timer Rec”, you can easily search for the programme series and set series timer recordings.

– Refer to step 5 (> left) for more information about

“Simplified Search” and “Detailed Search”.

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the

programme.

After searching > below, Tips

Notes

≥Searching by “Series Timer Rec” only works with titles recorded via

GUIDE Plus+.

≥If you press [RETURN ], the unit may return to the

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

Tips

After searching

1 Press [OK]. 2 If “Timer Recording” screen appears

Go to step 3 of “Timer Recording” (> 22) If “Selection Screen” appears

Press [3, 4] to select the item.

≥“View” > 19, Watching Television ≥“Single Timer Rec.” > 22, Timer Recording, step 3 ≥“Series Timer Rec.” > 34, Series recording, step 4 ≥“Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. – The timer icon disappears.

VQT2J27

Advanced Playback

All Titles

PICTURE / MUSIC

Table Display

“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display” “Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL ] [-RW‹V›] [+R ] [+R]DL ] [+ RW ] [-RW‹VR›] You can easily select and play recorded programmes by using DIRECT NAVIGATOR.

Tips

To select the title with the numbered buttons

e.g., [HDD]

e.g., [RAM] [-R] [- R] DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].

[HDD] To display the “Properties” screen Press [STATUS ] when a title with “ Info” on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected. (> 48)

To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance

“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD] “Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”

VQT2J27

Selecting Titles to Play

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles

HDD

007 008

BBC 1 10/10 FRI BBC 1 11/10 SAT

Previous Page 02/02 Next

OPTION

RETURN

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

Select

Info

VIDEO

- - -

- - -- - -- - -

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the title you want to watch, then

5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5]

115: [1] > [1] > [5]

5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Protected.

Not recorded due to recording protection (Digital broadcasts, etc.)

t It cannot be played because data is damaged, etc.

μ Currently recording.

Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD (> 32, Relief Recording)

“One time only recording” restriction (> 96, CPRM)

Groups of titles ([HDD] only)

Title that was recorded but has not yet been played ([HDD] only)

(NTSC)

(PAL)

1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press [OK].

Title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV System currently selected on the unit. ≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit (> 76).

Press [OPTION].

e.g.,

PICTURE

Grouped Titles screen

Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly or series timer

All Titles screen

Displays all titles.

(in Thumbnail Display) recording mode are bundled and displayed as one item. (in Thumbnail Display)

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Titles

HDD

007

008

BBC 10/10 FRI

BBC 11/10 SAT

Dolphins DolphinsChantal Show

- - -

OPTION

Page 02/02

Info

RETURN

Select

MUSIC

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10/10

11/10

DolphinsChantal Show

OPTION

Page 02/02

Select

Info

RETURN

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

Select the item marked with and press [OK] to display the

bundled titles.

To sort the titles for easy searching

[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only) This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback from many titles.

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press [OK].

If you select an item other than “No.” ≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback

of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles continuously.)

≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being

played back.

≥If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to

another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be cancelled.

To play grouped titles [HDD]

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group, then press

[OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title, then press

[OK].

To edit the group of titles [HDD]

[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group, then

press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary titles. ≥Press [;] to cancel.

2 Press [OPTION]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press [OK].

Create Group:

Press [2, 1] to select “Create”, then press [OK]. Selected titles are bundled to form a group.

Release Grouping

Press [2, 1] to select “Release”, then press [OK]. ≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group

are released.

≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from

the group.

Regarding the group name

The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

HDD

10/10

11/10

DolphinsChantal Show

OPTION

Page 02/02

Select Info

RETURN

VIDEO

PICTURE

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles

MUSIC

HDD

BBC 18/10 SATBBC 11/10 SAT

Dolphins Dolphins 2

OPTION

Page 01/01

RETURN

Select Info

To change the group name

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK]. 4 Enter the name. (> 47, Entering Text)

≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will

not be changed.

Notes

This function is only available for Videos and not available for music or still pictures.

VIDEO

009

BBC 18/10 SAT

- - -- - -

VIDEO

PICTURE

MUSIC

+60s

Frame-by-Frame Viewing

During playback or – There are 5 search speeds. Each press increases

the search speed. ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 speeds)

–Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

Tips

Depending on the disc, search may not be possible.

Skip

You can skip to the beginning (or the end) of Title/ Chapter. Skip is operated for each chapter.

During playback or while paused or – Each press increases the number of skips.

–DivX: Press [:] to return to the beginning of the

title currently playing.

Quick View (Play k 1.3)

[HDD] [RAM] Allows you to increase the play speed slightly without distorting the audio.

During playback (Press and hold.)

PLAYx1. 3

– Press again to return to normal speed.

Direct Play

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL ] [-R W‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW ] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

While paused

– Each press shows the next or previous frame. – Press and hold to advance or reverse frame-by-

frame in succession.

–Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

Notes

≥[VCD] allow Frame-by-Frame in the forward direction only.

Time Slip

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not

work with finalised discs.) [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

Use to skip in 1-minute or 10-minute increments.

During playback

3, 4 to select the time, then

– Each time you press [3, 4], the time

increases [3] or decreases [4] by 1-minute intervals.

– Press and hold for 10-minute intervals.

TIME SLIP

During playback, you can access specific titles or scenes through direct entry of the numbered buttons.

≥[HDD] and DivX

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5]

≥MP3/WMA

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

ュユロユヵユ

リワヱヶヵ

ヴユロユヤヵ

≥Other discs

Input a 2-digit number e.g., 5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]

Slow-motion Play

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL ] [-RW‹V›] [+R ] [+R]DL ] [+ RW ] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD]

While paused or – There are 5 slow-motion speeds. Each press

increases the speed.

–Press [1] (PLAY) to restart normal playback.

Notes

≥If continued for approx. 5 minutes, slow-motion play pauses

automatically (except [DVD-V] [VCD]).

≥[VCD] allow slow-motion in the forward direction only.

Manual Skip

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (This function does not

work with finalised discs.) [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

1-minute skip function: Skips approx. 1 minute forward with each press.

During playback

10-second skip back function: Each time you press, play skips backward approximately 10 seconds.

During playback

-10s

Create Chapters

[HDD] [RAM] After creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can easily reach the head of scene using [:, 9] (SKIP) or play on Chapter View. (> 50)

During playback

CHAPTER

Tips

≥Chapters cannot be created during EXT LINK standby (> 28).

VQT2J27

Playing DivX, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)

Disc

View Pictures ( JPEG )

Play Music ( MP3&WMA ) Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )

Play Video ( DivX)

SD Card

Copy New Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Video (MPEG2) View Pictures (JPEG) Start Slideshow

USB device

Video (DivX) Picture ( JPEG ) Music (MP3&WMA) Update CD database on HDD

USB device

View Pictures ( JPEG ) Start Slideshow Copy New Pictures ( JPEG ) Copy All Pictures ( JPEG ) Copy Selected Pictures ( JPEG )

: Resume play

function (> 20)

You cannot select folders that contain no compatible files.

Showing the menu screen

[-R] [-R]DL] [C D] [SD ]

1 Insert the disc or card. 2 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the

item and press [OK].

e.g., [CD] [SD]

[USB]

1 Insert the USB memory. 2 Press [3, 4] to select a file type and press [OK].

e.g.

3 If the menu screen appears, press [3, 4] to select the

item and press [OK].

Playing DivX video contents

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:

DivX

is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.(> 18)

Show DivX Menu screen.

(> left, Showing the menu screen)

RETURN

No.

001 ABC.avi

Folder1 : 00025

Title Name

Page 001/001

Tree

Total Title : 001

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

≥Files are treated as titles. ≥Press [1] (PLAY) if the DivX Menu screen is not displayed.

3, 4 to select the title, then

Play starts on the selected title.

Showing the menu with FUNCTION MENU Display

e.g. selecting a file to play

1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the menu. 2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].

FUNCTION MENU

CD(DivX)

Playback

Recording

Copy

TV Guide

Others Drive Select

RETURN

DivX Picture Music

3 [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [SD]

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback”, then press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the file type, then press [OK].

[USB]

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select”, then press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the file type, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select

“Play Video ( DivX )”, “View Pictures ( JPEG )” or “Play Music ( MP3&WMA )” then press [OK].

≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5]

Tips

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To show other pages

Press [:, 9].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Notes

≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from

showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to adjust the aspect through the TV.

≥Successive play is not possible. ≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive or

the DVD drive.

Using the tree screen to find a folder

1 While the file list is displayed

Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display the tree screen.

F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.

RETURN

12.02.2009 Image001

Image002 Image003 Image004 Image005 Image006 Image007 Image008 Image009 Image010

DATA1 DATA2

Folder

F 1/21

DivX Menu

CD (DivX)

2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder, then press [OK].

The file list for the folder appears.

VQT2J27

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Regarding DivX VOD content

10 alphanumeric characters

DivX Registration screen before registration

001 Both Ends Freezing 002 Lady Starfish 003 Life on Jupiter 004 Metal Glue 005 Paint It Yellow

1 : My favorite

2 3 4 5

Total Track

Tree

G 1 T 1 TOTAL 1/111

MP3&WMA Menu

0 9

–

Number

GroupNo.

Tree

G 7/25

001 My favorite 001 Brazilian pops 002 Chinese pops 003 Czech pops 004 Hungarian pops 005 Liner notes 006 Japanese pops

007 Mexican pops

008 Philippine pops

MP3&WMA Menu

Number

G 8 T 14 TOTAL 40/111

MP3 music

–

0 9

[-R] [-R]DL] [C D] ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:

This DivX Certified

device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD.

Display the unit’s registration code.

(> 78, DivX Registration in “Others” tab)

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

DivX Registration

You must register this unit to play protected DivX videos. The registration code is necessary to register this unit.

Registration Code : XXXXXXXXXX

Please register at www.divx.com/vod/

RETURN

≥ After playing DivX VOD content for first time, the registration

code is not displayed.

≥ DivX VOD content purchased using a registration code

different from this unit’s code, you will not able to play on this content.

Cancel the unit’s registration

(> 78, DivX Registration) Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” in “DivX Registration”. Use the deregistration code to cancel the registration in www.divx.com.

Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of times

Some DivX VOD contents can only be played a set number of times. When you play this content, the number of times already played and initially playable number of times is displayed.

≥ The remaining number of plays decreases each time a

programme is played. However, when playing from the point where play was previously stopped, the remaining number of plays does not decrease due to the resume play function.

Playing music files

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] You can play MP3/WMA files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.(> 18) ≥ You cannot play MP3 or WMA files on the USB memory

while recording or copying.

Show MP3&WMA Menu screen.

(> 38, Showing the menu screen)

Selected group A:Group No.

3, 4 to select a track, then

B: Track No. in the

group

C: Track No./Total

tracks in all groups

to play.

Tips

≥“ ” indicates the track currently playing.

To stop playing

Press [∫].

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [:, 9].

To select the track with the numbered buttons

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]

Notes

≥If the Power off link function (> 44) is activated, this unit will

automatically be set to standby mode and the music will stop as you set the TV to set to standby mode.

Using the Tree Screen to Find a Group

From the track list

1 while a track is highlighted to display the tree screen.

A: Selected Group No./Total Group No.

If the group has no compatible track, “--” is displayed as the group number.

B: You cannot select a group that contains no

compatible track.

3, 4 to select a group, then

– The track list for the selected group appears.

Tips

To return to the track list

Press [RETURN ].

VQT2J27

Playing DivX, Music files and Still Pictures (JPEG)

Album View screen

Regarding Album View screen > right

Sample pictures > right

e.g., HDD

Playing still pictures

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]

≥ For more information about still picture files that can be

played on this unit (> 18)

≥ Inserting, removing the SD card (> 82)

Show Album View screen.

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD] (> 38, Showing the menu screen) [HDD] [RAM] While stopped 1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. 2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View

HDD

001

- - -

RETURN

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the album,

then

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View

HDD

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the still

002

Total 20--.--.--

- - -

Page 01/01

OPTION

Album Name

103__DVD

0001

0002 0003 0004

0005 0006 0007 0008

0009

---- ---- ----

OPTION

RETURN

picture, then

Total 3

Date: 1. 2.2006 Sample

Slideshow

Page 001/001

VIDEO

- - -

Slideshow

PICTURE

Select All Playlist View

PICTURE

MUSIC

Tips

DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons

Picture and folder protected Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])

To stop viewing a picture

Press [∫].

To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK].

– You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

To select the still picture or album with the numbered buttons

Album

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5]

Still picture

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]

15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

Regarding Album View screen

Still pictures copied from USB memories and SD cards are grouped by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 53).

[HDD] [RAM]

Grouped by date

002

Date: 10/10/2010

Total 68

Number of pictures/Shooting date

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL ] [CD ] [USB] [SD]

Album

002

10/10/10 Zoological park

Total 24

Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name ≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC etc.,

the information about the recording date may not be displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--/--/--].

Notes

≥Still pictures cannot be played during recording or copying.

Sample Pictures

≥Sample JPEG pictures are pre-installed on HDD of this unit. You can

play them back or start slideshow (> below) with them. If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel Protection” and then delete them. (> 49)

Start Slideshow

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL ] [CD ] [USB] [SD]

You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval with favourite music.

While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen

is displayed

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the album.

Tips

You can also start Slideshow by pressing [OPTION] and press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and then press [OK].

To select multiple albums for starting Slideshow:

1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album. 2 Press [;].

A check mark appears.

3 Repeat steps 1-2 until you select all necessary albums. 4 Perform step 2.

To select all albums for starting Slideshow:

1 Press [∫] in step 1. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” then press [OK].

3 Perform step 2.

[USB] [SD] To start Slideshow on the menu screen:

1 Insert the USB memory or SD card.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, then press [OK].

Notes

Sample Music is selected for default Background Music, which is played with Slideshow. Refer to “Slideshow Settings” to turn off or change the Background Music. (> 38)

PLAYx1. 3

≥Press [;] again to cancel the selection.

The menu is automatically displayed. (> 38)

VQT2J27

Slideshow Settings

ヴヵモヵヶヴ

Shooting Date ≥Depending on the camera or editing software;

shooting dates may not be displayed correctly.

Rotate Pictures

While the Album View (Playlist (Picture)) screen

is displayed (> 40)

OPTION

3, 4 to select “Slideshow

Settings”, then

3, 4 to select “Picture Settings” or

“Background Music Settings”, then

3,4

select the setting (

After finishing settings

3,4,2,1

Picture Settings

Please set the following functions.

Display Interval

Repeat Play

Random

SELECT

to select the item, then 2,1 to

below).

to select “Set”, then

Normal

Off

SetSet Cancel

RETURN

While playing a picture

OPTION

3,4

to select “Rotate

RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT”, then

Rotate RIGHT

Rotate LEFT

RETURN

Tips

To return to the picture to its original position

Press [3, 4] to select the opposite rotation in step 2, then press [OK].

Notes

≥Rotation information will not be stored.

– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures – When disc, card or album is protected – When played on other equipment – When copying pictures – When changing date

≥If you remove the SD card while the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is

displayed, picture rotation information may not be properly stored. Remove the SD card after you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

≥“Rotate RIGHT” and “Rotate LEFT” do not work during Slideshow.

Zoom

While playing a picture

OPTION

To zoom in:

3,4

to select “Zoom in”, then

Display Interval: Select the desired interval. (“Normal”, “Long” or

Repeat Play: Select “On” to play pictures in the selected album

Random: Select “On” to play pictures in the selected album at

Background Music Settings

Please set the following functions.

Background Music

Random

Music Selection

Background Music: Select “On” to play Slideshow with Background

Random: Select “On” to play Background Music at random. Music Selection:

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Music Selection” and press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of Background Music

and press [OK]. ≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-installed on HDD.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background Music and press

[OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”.

“Short”) ≥The display interval may vary depending on the

picture data size.

repeatedly.

random.

Off

Sample Music

SELECT

SetSet Cancel

RETURN

Music. Select “Off” to play Slideshow without Background Music.

Notes

≥Music albums on HDD, a disc and a USB memory can be used as the

Slideshow Background Music. However, when selecting still images on a disc or a USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the same media cannot be used as the Background Music. (Even if a music album on the same media is selected, the music is not played.)

≥“Sample Music” cannot be deleted or changed to other files. ≥“Music Selection” setting turns back to “Sample Music” when

removing media on which specified Background Music is recorded or deleting specified Background Music files.

≥DTS-CD cannot be played back as Slideshow Background Music.

Tips

To return to the picture to its original size

Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step2, then press [OK].

Notes

≥When zooming in, the still picture may be cut off. ≥“Zoom in” information is not stored. ≥“Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work with images that have a

resolution larger than 640k480 pixels.

≥“Zoom in” and “Zoom out” do not work during Slideshow.

Picture Properties

Picture information is shown (e.g., shooting date).

While playing a picture

twice to display picture properties.

18:53:50 11/10

Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006 Date 1/ 1/ 2010 No. 3 / 9

From the Picture (JPEG) View screen

3, 4, 2, 1 to select the

OPTION

picture, then

3,4

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown. – To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

to select “Properties”, then

VQT2J27

Playing music

To play music CD

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

Play Music

Copy Music

SELECT

RETURN

3, 4 to select “Play Music”, then

– The unit starts accessing the Gracenote®

database (> 66) and searches for the title information.

≥If search results indicate that multiple titles were

found, press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK]. The music CD starts playing back.

Press [3,4] to select the track, then press [OK]

≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [5], 15: [1] > [5]

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Notes

≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying. ≥When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes while the

screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed if “Screen Saver” is set to “On” in the Setup menu (> 76). To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

Useful functions during music play

Operations during play

Stop Press [∫].

The stopped position is memorized. Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position. ≥ If [∫] is pressed several times, the position

is cleared.

Pause Press [;].

Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Search Press [6] or [5].

The speed increases up to 5 steps. Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

Skip During play or while paused, press [:]

or [9].

Skip to the track you want to play. Each press increases the number of skips.

Tips

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR]. Playback continues.

To play music recorded on HDD

Copying music to HDD > 66

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to select “MUSIC”.

3, 4

≥You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [1] > [1] > [5]

to select the album, then

Repeat Play

[HDD]

Sort

[HDD]

Properties [HDD] [CD]

You can select the item which you want to repeat. While playing

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play

Setting”, then press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then press

[OK].

≥ Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.

You can change the order of the Album View alphabetically. While Album View screen is displayed

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort”, then press

[OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name”,

then press [OK].

To cancel the sorted screen

Press [3, 4] to select “No.”, then press [OK].

While Track View screen is displayed

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then

press [OK].

To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

VQT2J27

3, 4

≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.

e.g., 5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5] 15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5] 115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5] 1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]

to select the track, then

Convenient Functions

This icon indicates that the Pause Live TV is working.

FUNCTION MENU Display

By using the FUNCTION MENU you may access the main functions quickly and easily. ≥ If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the

Setup menu, FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power on. (> 43)

With the unit stopped

3, 4 to select a function, then

3, 4 to select an item, then

Select

10/10

RETURN

OPTION

a function and an item.

You can access selected function easily.

VIDEO

11/10

DolphinsChantal Show

Select Info

Page 02/02

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN

Remain

30:00 SP

Video

Picture Music

DELETE Navigator Grouped Titles

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others Drive Select

Playback

Select when you wish to playback the contents. The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen or menu screen etc. will be displayed.

≥ Video (> 20, 36) ≥ DivX (> 38) ≥ Picture (> 40) ≥ Music (> 39, 42) ≥ Top Menu (> 20) ≥ Menu (> 20)

Recording

Select when you wish to perform manual timer recording, or check the timer recording. The timer recording list will be displayed. (> 30, 31)

Delete

Select the title or file type you wish to delete. The DELETE Navigator screen will be displayed.

≥ Video (> 23) ≥ Picture (> 55) ≥ Music (> 55)

Copy

Select the copy method.

≥ Video (HDD to DVD) (> 60) ≥

Advanced Copy (>61

)

≥ Copy Music (> 66)

≥ Copy New Pictures (> 65)

TV Guide

Select when you wish to watch or record a programme. The TV Guide will be displayed. (> 19, 22)

Others

Select and execute a function other than those above, such as recording or setting.

≥ Playlists (> 51, 56) ≥ Flexible Rec (> 27) ≥ DV Auto Rec (> 29) ≥ HDD Management (> 70) ≥ DVD Management (> 70)≥ Card Management (> 70) ≥ Setup (> 72)

PICTURE

MUSIC

Drive Select

Change which drive is used.

≥ HDD ≥ DVD ≥ SD ≥ USB

Tips

To exit the FUNCTION MENU

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

To pause the TV programme you are watching —Pause Live TV

You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

1 Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV

input to suit the connections to this unit.

2 Turn on this unit and press [WXCH] to select the

channel.

3 When you want to pause the TV programme

Press [PAUSE LIVE TV].

HDD



BBC

Pause Live TV

4 When you want to resume playback

Press [1](PLAY). – The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording

mode (> 25) regardless of the recording mode and the drive selected before starting saving.

– At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be

temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending on the HDD free space.)

Operations during Pause Live TV

Search Press [6, 5]. Pause Press [;].

Quick View Press and hold [1](PLAY/a1.3).

Slow-motion While paused, press [6] or [5].

Stop Pause Live TV

≥ Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.

≥ Press again to return to the normal speed.

The speed increases up to 5 steps. ≥ Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.

1 Press [∫]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press

[OK].

Notes

≥The pause live TV function does not work for Digital Teletext. (> 46) ≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer

recording starts.

≥The Pause Live TV function does not work

– when the clock is not set – while recording – while timer recording – while EXT LINK recording, etc.

≥You cannot change audio or subtitle during resume play. ≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is full

or the saving lasts 8 hours.

≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after started. ≥“DVB Multi Audio” of on-screen menu cannot be switched during

Pause Live TV.

VQT2J27

Linked Operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”/Q Link)

You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using “VIERA Link” or Q Link.

What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”? [VIERA]Link]

VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable. See the operating instructions for connected equipment for operational details.

≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions

provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be guaranteed.

≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function. ≥“HDAVI Control 5” is the newest standard (current as of December,

2009) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible equipment.

≥This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s conventional HDAVI

equipment.

≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’

equipment supporting VIERA Link function.

Preparation:

1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable and a fully wired

21-pin Scart cable (> 12), or to your receiver using an HDMI cable (> 81).

2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 77). (The default setting is “On”.) 3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment

(e.g., TV).

≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be

used as “HDAVI Control”.

4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this

unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI Control” function works properly.

Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat this procedure.

What is Q Link? [Q]Link]

Q Link is a convenient function that offers linked operations of this unit and a Panasonic TV. You can use this function by connecting the equipment with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable.

(When the TV is on) Easy playback

[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]

When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode ([VIERA]Link]) or AV input mode ([Q]Link]) and the TV displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

§1

, [1](PLAY)§2,

[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK] etc.

(When the TV is off) Power on link

[VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]

When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action. (Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)

Press [FUNCTION MENU]

§1

, [1](PLAY)§2,

[DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [PROG/CHECK]] etc.

≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] SVCD and MP3/WMA

The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.

Power off link [VIERA]Link] [Q]Link]

When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if the FUNCTION MENU etc. is displayed, during playback or when the unit is set to a timer recording. Even if the TV is turned off, the unit will not be turned off at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.

≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible

Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.

Preparation:

≥ Connect this unit to your TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

(> 10, 11).

Notes

The following systems from other manufacturers have similar function to Q Link from Panasonic. For details, refer to your television’s operating instructions or consult your dealer.

≥Q Link (registered trademark of Panasonic) ≥DATA LOGIC (registered trademark of Metz) ≥Easy Link (registered trademark of Philips) ≥Megalogic (registered trademark of Grundig) ≥SMARTLINK (registered trademark of Sony)

Notes

≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment

condition.

≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected

equipment (e.g., TV) too.

Direct TV Recording [VIERA]Link]

§3

[Q]Link]

This function allows you to immediately start recording the programme that you are viewing on the TV.

≥Depending on the TV type connected with this unit, this function

may not work.

Press and hold [¥ DIRECT TV REC] for 1 second.

Recording starts

To stop recording

Press [∫]. ≥The titles are recorded to the HDD. ≥If you switch TV channels while using Direct TV Recording, the

Direct TV Recording may stops.

≥When “EXT-L” lights on the unit’s display (> 28), Direct TV

Recording is unavailable.

§1

This button is available only when this unit is on.

§2

When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents from where playback started. In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.

§3

This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.

VQT2J27

Easy control only with VIERA remote

Play

Exit

Pause

Stop

Control Panel

control

If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions. You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control. The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV. Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.

≥ The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press

incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.

≥ The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked

operation is finished.

Using the FUNCTION MENU to operate this unit [VIERA]Link]

This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later. 1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV

remote control.

≥If this unit is turned off, this unit will turn on automatically. ≥About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 43, 76)

2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote

control, then press [OK].

Pause Live TV programme [VI ERA]Link]

This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.

You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand. If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.

1 When you want to pause the TV programme

Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.

≥This unit turns on automatically.

2 When you want to resume

Display the Control Panel (> right), then press [OK].

≥The TV programme resumes.

Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit

[VIERA]Link]

This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.

By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (> below)and display the Top Menu for DVDVideo.

1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU” using the TV

remote control. (> left)

2 Press [OPTION].

≥You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top

Menu for DVD-Video is displayed or while DVDVideo is being copied.

3 Select an item, then press [OK].

Control Panel

FUNCTION MENU

Top Menu

Drive Select

RETURN

Switch to TV Displayed when watching with the

tuner of this unit. It will return to the TV picture.

Control Panel Control Panel is displayed.

(> below)

FUNCTION MENU FUNCTION MENU is displayed. Top Menu [DVD-V] Top Menu is displayed. (> 20) Menu [DVD-V] Menu is displayed. (> 20)

Standby Settings “Standby Settings” screen is

displayed (> 78).

Drive Select Select the HDD, DVD or SD drive.

Slideshow “Album View” screen is displayed

(

> 40).

Rotate RIGHT/Rotate

Rotate the still pictures. (> 41)

LEFT (JPEG)

Zoom in/Zoom out (JPEG)

Enlarge or shrink the still picture. (> 41)

Audio Description Audio Description screen is

displayed. (> 46)

Refer to “Notes” on page 43, “To pause the TV programme you are watching —Pause Live TV”.

Tips

To stop Pause Live TV

1 Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Using the Control Panel

Using the “Control Panel”, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc. with the TV remote control. Select “Control Panel”, then press [OK] in step3 (> above). The Control Panel is displayed (> right)

≥ While playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.

–[3]: Pause, [4]:Stop,

[2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel

≥ While playing still pictures

–[4]: Stop, [2]:View previous picture,

[1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel

∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit

to standby mode

Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control, then set to standby mode.

∫ When not using “HDAVI Control

Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 77).

VQT2J27

Information Messages

ヴヵモヵヶヴ

Status message (> 47)

“info ”

Signal Quality (> 47)

Category(Favourite> 72)

e.g.,

Digital Channel Information

You can display the information about programmes (programme name, broadcast time, etc.).

With the unit stopped

to show the screen information.

When the digital channel information is being displayed – Press [STATUS ] again and detailed information

will be displayed (only when “info ” is displayed).

HDD

1: 07 SP

1 DVB

BBC ONE Wales



1 BBC ONE Wales

Wales

today

17:00 – 17:15

NOW

Multi Audio SubtitleTXT

Digital channel information

Channel and Station Name

Programme name and Broadcast time

Even with programmes with “AD”, “Multi Audio”, “TXT” and “Subtitle” indications, you may not be able to use these services. To confirm the availability of these services, refer to the indications in the detailed information too.

These indications are not displayed properly unless the information sent from broadcast stations is correct.

Tips

To switch information of the current programme and the next programme

Press [2, 1]. ≥NOW: current programme

≥NEXT: next programme

To select the information of another channel

Press [3, 4]. ≥Press [OK] to watch the selected channel.

To change the length of time digital channel information is displayed for

(> 76, On-Screen Messages)

Notes

≥Every time you change the channel, digital channel information

appears automatically. They disappear again after a short time.

≥If you record a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that is not

being received correctly, digital channel information is also

recorded and will remain visible during playback.

VQT2J27

All Channels

17:11

Change Category

info

1 BBC ONE Wales

Wales

today

17:00 - 17:15

In the 1970’s, John Belshi, working with National Lampoon, mol with Dan Aykuoyd, then a host of a children’s tv program, and owner of a speakeasy called the “505 Club”. Dan from Toronto, put on a record called Straight Up. by the Downchild Blues Band.

1 BBC ONE Wales

BBC News 19:00 - 19:30

Encrypted

During scrambled broadcasting (You cannot watch the broadcast).

Audio Description service may be available.

Programme is broadcast in multi-channel sound (> 69, DVB Multi Audio). To select audio language (> 73, DVB Preferred Multi Audio)

Digital Teletext may be available.

Subtitle may be available.

NOW

Multi Audio SubtitleTXT

No Signal

NOW

Multi Audio AD

All Channels

17:11

Exit info

Detailed information

All Channels

19:03

Change Category

1 BBC ONE Wales

Wales

today

17:00 - 17:15

NOW

[AD,S]

Subtitle TXT

info

17:11

All Channels

Exit info

Subtitle

Listening to the Audio Description

This function can aid visually-impaired viewers by adding an audio track to describe events on-screen.

When “AD” appears in digital channel information

OPTION

to show the OPTION menu.

3, 4 to select “Audio Description”,

then

– Audio Description screen appears.

3, 4 to select “Audio Description”.

3 4

2, 1 to select “Auto”, then

Notes

≥Programmes are recorded with Audio Description when you record

them with “Audio Description” set to “Auto”.

Tips

≥To turn off the Audio Description

In the step 4 (> above), press [2, 1] to select “Off”, then press [RETURN ].

≥To change the volume

In the step 3 to set the volume, then press

≥You can switch the Audio Description and change its volume during

recording and timer recording.

Showing the Digital Teletext

When “TXT” appears in digital channel information

ヵユヹヵ

– Press again to hide.

Notes

≥During recording the Digital Teletext function is not possible. ≥When subtitle is on or the digital channel information is displayed, the

Digital Teletext function does not work.

Tips

To view another page of Digital Teletext

Press [3, 4] to select another page, then press [OK]. ≥You can also use the numbered buttons to select another page.

Quickly access to certain topic areas and navigation

Use colour buttons according to on-screen instructions.

Showing Subtitles

When “Subtitle” appears in digital channel information

ヴヵヵロ

– Press again to hide.

Notes

≥Programmes are recorded with subtitles when you record them with

the subtitles setting set to “Subtitles On”.

≥You cannot switch subtitles during timer recording.

Tips

To select subtitle language (> 73, DVB Preferred Subtitles)

Changing the Category

You can select one of your favourite channels by changing the category [such as Free Channels, Radio and Registered Favourites (> 72)].

When digital channel information is displayed

(Blue)

RETURN

(> above)

, press [

[

3, 4]

to select “Volume” then press [2, 1]

RETURN

to show the Digital Teletext.

to show subtitles.

to change the category.

ヴヵモヵヶヴ

1 DVB

BBC ONE Wales

HDD REC

DVD REC

Current media Shows current recording or play status.

Channel information

Recording drive/Copy progress indicator

The current date and time

Elapsed play time and recording mode

When using Pause Live TV

No Display

Elapsed recording time and recording mode

Current time

Remaining recording time and recording mode (e.g.: “13:50 XP” indicates 13 hour and 50 minutes in XP mode)

• Disc remaining time may slightly differ between different models.

13:50 XP

18:53:50 11/10

 T1 0:05.14 XP  T2 0:00.10 XP

Remain



1 DVB

BBC ONE Wales

HDD REC

DVD REC

Play 15:05:13

Live 15:10:46

The time when the picture currently displayed was broadcasted

Entering Text

e.g., “Enter Title Name” screen

Signal Quality

No Signal: The digital broadcast signal is not

being received.

No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.

Notes

≥If “No Signal” is displayed, check that the current digital broadcast

channel is correctly broadcasting.

Status Messages

The following messages and displays appear to let you know what operations are being performed and the status of the unit.

During playback and/or recording

Several times to cycle through available displays.

You can give names to recorded titles, etc.

Also, you can search for desired programmes on GUIDE Plus+ list by entering key words or the programme name. (Free Word Search, Find Titles) (> 35)

When viewing the “Enter Title Name” screen

etc.

Enter Title Name

Top Menu Preview



Delete



Add to List



Name List

Set



SELECT

RETURN

12345

ABC a

DEF d

GH INOg

JKL j

PQRSp

TUV t

WXY Z w

67890

ef/ %

hi $&

kl @

qrs( )

uv{ }

xyz

;

Space

]

3, 4, 2, 1 to select a character, then

– Repeat this step to enter other characters.

Using the numbered buttons to enter characters

e.g.: entering the letter “R”

1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row. 2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”. 3 Press [OK].

To enter a space

Press [DELETE ¢], then press [OK].

To delete a character

Press [;] on a character in the name field.

To cancel in the middle

Press [RETURN ]. ≥Characters will not be saved.

STOP

when you’ve finished entering text.

New Channel Message

When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings and Favourites are deleted and the timer recording programmes are also cancelled.). However recotdings on the HDD will not be deleted.

A new DVB Channel has been found. Start DVB Auto Setup? Selecting DVB Auto Setup will delete all Timer Programmes.

Tips

The display/hide setting can be changed (> 47).

New Channel

Yes

RETURN

Tips

∫ To add a name to the list

You can add frequently used names and recall them later. Maximum number of added names: 20 Maximum number of characters per name: 44 After entering the name (step 1)

1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List”, then press

[OK].

≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.

2. Press [2, 1] to select “Add”, then press [OK].

≥Press [RETURN ] to cancel.

∫ To recall an added name

1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List”, then press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled,

then press [OK].

∫ To delete an added name

1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List”, then press

[OK].

≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.

2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.

3. Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name”, then press [OK].

4. Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

5. Press [RETURN ].

Notes

≥The number of characters that can be entered depends on what

kind of things you name.

≥If you enter a long name, only part of it

is shown in the Top Menu after finalisation (> 71). When entering a title name, the name that will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu Preview” window.

Enter Title Name

Chapter 1_

Top Menu Preview

Chapter 1



Delete

VQT2J27

Titles—Editing

Advanc ed Editing

Properties

Create Group

Release Grouping

Table Display

All Titles

Chapter View

Delete

TV Guide Explorer

Edit

Refer to “Title Operations” (> right)

Searching using programme information of titles recorded to the HDD (> 35)

To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 36)

Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance (> 36)

If you select “Chapter View” (> 50)

Properties

Edit

TV Guide Explorer

Create Group

Release Grouping

Chapter View

Ta ble Display

Delete

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW ‹V ›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You can not edit finalised discs.) [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]

You can edit titles on the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen: deleting unwanted parts of titles such as commercials, changing Thumbnail, dividing and deleting titles, etc.

Tips

≥ Maximum numbers of titles on a disc

[HDD] [RA M] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

499 99 49

Title Operations

Delete

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Use to delete unneeded titles. Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to

confirm.

Accessing the Title View

Preparation:

≥ [RAM] Release protection ( > 70, Setting Protection).

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. 2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title.

– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)

4 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

≥ Items that cannot be selected are grey.

Enter Title Name Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete Change Thumbnail

Divide Title

Notes

≥ [HDD] [RAM] Deleting an item increases the available disc

space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.

≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available disc space does not

increase after deletion.

≥ [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available disc space increases when you

delete the last title (the recording space may increase slightly when other titles are deleted).

≥ Available disc space may not increase after deleting a short

title.

≥ [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] To recover total disc space, the

disc needs to be formatted. (> 70)

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] To view title information (e.g., date, time) Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> le

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].

Properties

Football

No. 001 Date Channel T5

Time18:07

12/11/2006 SUN

Rec time2:15(SP Genre Sport

OK RETURN

ft).

)

Notes

≥ You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc. ≥ [+R] [+R]DL] Management information is recorded in unused

sections when you edit discs. The available space on these discs decreases each time you edit their contents.We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to discs.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete, Set up Protection, Cancel Protection) Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

VQT2J27

Tips

≥ [HDD] You can also press [STATUS ] to display the

“Properties” screen when a title with “ Info” on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected.

Enter Title Name

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] You can give a name for the title.

Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> left).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name”, then press

[OK].

Entering Text (> 47) – [HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title

names in the group will not be changed.

Set up Protection/Cancel Protection

The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.

[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Use to prevent accidental erasure of titles.

Change Thumbnail

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Changes the thumbnail picture shown in the Title View screen.

Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 48).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4] to select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel

Protection”, then press [OK].

7 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Title

HDD

007

BBC 0 27/10 MON

-- --

008

BBC 0 27/1

Partial Delete

[HDD] [RAM] Use to remove unwanted parts of titles, such as commercials. Important: Once deleted, the parts cannot be recovered.

Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 48).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4] to select “Partial Delete”, then press

[OK].

Enter Title Name

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Change Thumbnail

Divide

Title

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete

HDD

008

Start End

- -:- -.- - - -:- -.- -

RETURN

PLAY

VIDEO

Start

End

Finish

0:43.21

7 Press [OK] to set the “Start” point and then press

[OK] again to set the “End” point of the section you want to erase.

– For quicker editing (> below, Tips) – To delete multiple sections:

Press [3, 4] to select “Next”, and repeat this step.

8 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK]. 9 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to

confirm.

Notes

≥ You may not be able to specify start and end points within 3

seconds of each other.

≥ Available disc space may not increase after erasing short

parts of titles.

Perform steps 1 – 4 of “

Accessing the Title View” (> 48).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4] to select “Change Thumbnail”, then

press [OK].

Enter Title Name

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Change Thumbnail

Divide

Title

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail

HDD

008

Change

- -:- -.- -

RETURN

VIDEO



Change

Finish

0:00.01

Start play and select the image

of a thumbnail.

7 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play. 8 Press [OK] at the point you want to use as the

thumbnail.

– For quicker editing (> below, Tips) – To change the thumbnail:

Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at the point you want to use as the thumbnail.

9 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK].

Divide Title

[HDD] [RAM] You can divide a title into two. Once divided, titles cannot be recombined.

Perform steps 1 – 4 of “Accessing the Title View” (> 48).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4] to select “Divide Title”, then press [OK].

Enter Title Name

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Partial Delete

Change Thumbnail

Divide

Title

DIRECT NAVIGATOR

HDD

Divide Title

008

Divide

- -:- -.- -

RETURN

PLAY

VIDEO

Preview

Divide

Finish

0:00.00

7 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

– For quicker editing (> below, Tips) – Selecting “Preview”, then pressing [OK] plays the title

from 10 seconds prior, to 10 seconds after the division point.

– To change the point to divide at:

Press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [1](PLAY) to bring to the point where you want to divide, then press [OK].

8 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then press [OK]. 9 Press [2] to select “Divide”, then press [OK].

– The title is divided at that point.

Tips

For quicker editing

≥ Use Search (> 37) or Time Slip (> 37) to find the desired point. ≥ To skip to the start or end of a title/chapter press [:] (start) or [9] (end). ≥ For better precision, use Slow-motion (> 37) and Frame-by-Frame (> 37).

Notes

≥ Divided titles retain the name of the original. ≥ A short amount of video and audio just before and after the

division point get cut out.

≥ You cannot divide a title when the resulting parts are too

short or total number of titles exceeds 99.

≥ [HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.

VQT2J27

Chapters—Creating and Editing

Title

Chapter

Chapter Chapter

Properties

Edit

TV Guide Explorer

Create Group

Release Grouping

Chapter View

Ta ble Display

Delete

Refer to “Chapter Operations” (> right).

[HDD] [RAM] When creating chapters in your favourite scenes, you can easily reach the head of scene using [:, 9] (SKIP) or play on Chapter View.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Tips

≥ Chapter

Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.

≥ [HDD] [RAM]: You can change the order of chapters and

create a Playlist (Video) (> 51).

“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 74) “Automatic”:

Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter start points on them automatically. ≥ Depending on the programme to be recorded or the

Recording Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.

“5 minutes”:

Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at approximately 5-minute interval.

≥ Maximum numbers of chapters on a disc

[HDD]: Approx. 1000 per title [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]: Approx. 1000 [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: Approx. 254

Accessing the Chapter View

Allows viewing and editing chapters individually.

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive. 2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title. 4 Press [OPTION] to display the OPTION

menu.

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”

then press [OK].

6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a

chapter.

– Multiple editing (> right, Tips)

To p lay Press [OK].

To e dit Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

Delete Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Title View

You can go back to the Title View.

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete Chapter) Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

Chapter Operations

Delete Chapter

You can delete the chapters for each title. Important: Once deleted, recorded contents cannot be recovered.

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).

8 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Chapter”, then press

[OK].

9 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

Create Chapter

You can divide a title into multiple chapters. Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).

8 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Chapter”, then press

[OK].

Delete Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Title View

DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter

HDD

008

RETURN

PLAY

VIDEO

Create

Finish

0:43.21

9 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.

– For quicker editing (> 49, Tips) – Repeat this step to create additional chapters.

: Press [3, 4]

to select “Finish”, then press [OK].

Notes

≥ A short portion of the title just after the creation point may be

lost.

Combine Chapters

You can combine the divided chapters. Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Chapter View” (> left).

8 Press [3, 4] to select “Combine Chapters”, then

press [OK].

9 Press [2] to select “Combine”, then press [OK].

– The selected chapter gets combined with the next

chapter.

VQT2J27

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video)

Title

Chapter

Title

Chapter

Playlist (Video)

Refer to “Editing Playlists (Video)/ Chapters” (> right).

[HDD]

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] (play only)

You can create Playlists (Video) by grouping your favourite scenes (chapters) from the recorded titles and edit the created Playlists (Video).

Tips

[HDD] [RAM] A Playlist (Video) is a compilation of your favourite chapters as shown in the chart below.

Copying (> 58) a Playlist (Video) will create a title.

≥Editing Playlists (Video) doesn’t modify titles. ≥Playlists (Video) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use

much capacity.

Creating Playlists (Video)

[HDD] [RAM] Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”.

(> left)

5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title, then press [4].

– Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then

skip to step 7.

6 Press [2, 1] to select the source chapter you want to

add to a Playlist (Video), then press [OK].

–Press [3] to cancel. – Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter”, then press

[OK] if you want to create a new chapter in the source title (> 50).

ess [2, 1] to select the position to insert the

7 Pr

chapter, then press [OK].

–Press [3] repeatedly to return to step 5, if you want to

add additional source titles.

Chapters are registered to the Playlist (Video). Repeat steps 6 and 7 to add other chapters.

8 Press [RETURN ] to finish and exit the screen.

Notes

≥ Playlists (Video) cannot be created while recording or

copying.

≥ You are allowed a maximum of 99 Playlists (Video), with

approximately 1000 chapters per Playlist (Video).

Accessing the Playlist (Video) View

Preparation:

≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the

recorded title to be edited.

≥ [RAM] Release protection ( > 70, Setting Protection).

With the unit stopped

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists”, then press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

Remain

Playlists Flexible Rec DV Auto Rec HDD Management Setup

30:00 SP

[HDD]

When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO”.

To p lay Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlists (Video) to play, then press [OK].

To create Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”, then press [OK] (> right, Creating Playlists (Video)).

To e dit Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlists (Video), then press [OPTION].

– Multiple editing (> 52, Tips in “Edit”)

Create

Copy

Enter Name

Change Thumbnail

Delete

Properties

Edit

Chapter View

PICTURE

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

FUNCTION MENU

RETURN

Remain

Playlists

Flexible Rec DV Auto Rec HDD Management Setup

30:00 SP

Editing Playlists (Video)/Chapters

Delete

[HDD] [RAM] Use to delete unneeded Playlists (Video).

Important: Once deleted, Playlists (Video) contents cannot be recovered (titles are not affected).

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”.

(> left)

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to

confirm.

Tips

To delete during play

1. Press [DELETE ¢]. A confirmation message displays.

2. Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to confirm.

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] Playlist (Video) information (e.g., length and date) is shown.

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”.

(> left)

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].

Tips

To exit the screen

Press [OK].

If you select “Chapter View” (> 52)

VQT2J27

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video)

Refer to “Chapter Operations” (> right)

Edit

[HDD] [RAM] You can create and copy Playlists (Video), and change the thumbnail.

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”

(> 51).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4] to select desired operation from the

menu displayed location, then press [OK] (> below).

Create 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create”, then

press [OK]. (> 51, Creating Playlists (Video))

Copy 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then

press [OK].

2 Press [2] to select “Copy”, then press

[OK].

Enter Name 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Name”,

then press [OK].

2 Enter a name for the Playlists (Video).

(> 47, Entering Text).

Change Thumbnail

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Change

Thumbnail”, then press [OK].

2 Press [1] (PLAY). Use Time Slip

(> 37), Slow-motion (> 37), Frame-byFrame (> 37), or Search (> 37) to find the desired point.

3 Press

[OK] at the image you wish you

use for your thumbnail.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then

press [OK]. – The thumbnail picture is now

changed.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

Chapter Operations

Add Chapter 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Chapter”,

then press [OK]. (> 51, Creating Playlists (Video))

Move Chapter 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Move Chapter”,

then press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

position to insert the chapter, then press [OK].

Create Chapter

Playlists Move Chapter

HDD

01 12/10 SUN 0:11

001

002

0:10.240:10.24

Previous Page 01/01 Next

RETURN

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Chapter”,

then press [OK].

0:19.36

VIDEO

--- ---

--- ------ ---

2 Press [1] (PLAY). Use Time Slip (> 37),

Slow-motion (> 37), Frame-by-Frame (> 37), or Search (> 37) to find the desired point.

3 Press [OK] at the point you want to

divide.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish”, then

press [OK].

Combine Chapters

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Combine

Chapters”, then press [OK].

2 Press [2] to select “Combine”, then

press [OK]. – The selected chapter gets combined

with the next chapter.

Delete Chapter

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Chapter”,

then press [OK].

2 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press

[OK].

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete, Copy) Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

Chapter View

[HDD] [RAM] You can add, move, divide, combine or delete chapters in the Playlists (Video).

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Video) View”

(> 51).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Chapter View”, then press

[OK].

6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a chapter.

– Multiple editing (> right, Tips)

To p lay Press [OK].

To e dit Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

Add Chapter

Move Chapter

Create Chapter

Combine Chapters

Delete Chapter

Playlist View

You can go back to the Playlist View.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete Chapter) Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

VQT2J27

Still Pictures and Music—Editing

Refer to “Album (still picture)/ Picture Operations” (> right)

Refer to “Start Slideshow”/ ”Slideshow Settings”(> 40)

Refer to “Start Slideshow”/ “Slideshow Settings”(> 40)

Switch to Playlists (Picture) (> 40)

Properties

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album View

Delete Pictures

You can go back to the Album View.

Refer to “Album (still picture)/ Picture Operations” (> right).

Accessing the Album (still picture)/Picture View

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] (JPEG) [S D] You can edit pictures and albums.

Preparation:

≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD

drive.

≥ [RAM] [SD] Release protection ( > 70, Setting Protection)

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

Editing an album:

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.

– Multiple editing (> below, Tips) – When you want to create an album using “Create

Album”, press [OPTION] without selecting album.

Editing a still picture:

1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which

contains the still picture to edit, then press [OK].

2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture.

– Multiple editing (> below, Tips)

3 Press [OPTION] to display the menu list.

≥ Items that cannot be selected are grey.

e.g., [HDD] Editing an album

Start Slideshow Slideshow Settings

Add Pictures

Create Album

Edit Album

Copy to DVD

Playlist View

VIDEO/MUSIC

e.g., [HDD] Editing a still picture

Delete Album

Change Date

Set up Protection

Cancel Protection

Album (still picture)/Picture Operations

Notes

≥ Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change

Date”, “Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.

Add Pictures/Create Album

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/ Picture View” (> left).

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Pictures” or “Create

Album”, then press [OK].

5 Press [2] to select “Start” or “Yes”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album containing

picture to add, then press [OK].

7 Press [3, 4]

to select “Select pictures to copy” or

“Copy all pictures”, then press [OK].

≥ If “Select pictures to copy” is selected

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the picture, then press [OK].

≥ If “Copy all pictures” is selected

All the still pictures in the album will be copied.

8 Press [1] to select “No” to finish copying, then press

[OK].

– If you want to continue copying, select “Yes”, then

repeat steps 6 – 7.

Only when you select “Create Album”

9 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No”, then press [OK].

≥ If “Yes” is selected

You can give a name for the album (> 47, Entering Tex t) .

≥ If “No” is selected

The album name is automatically given.

Notes

≥ [RAM] [SD] “Add Pictures” is available only for the folders

conforming to DCF.

Notes

≥ You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/

CD-RW and USB memory.

≥ You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.

Tips

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

[Only Delete Album, Delete Pictures, Change Date (Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is displayed), Set up Protection, Cancel Protection, Copy to DVD, Copy to HDD] Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

To select all albums

Press [∫]. After confirmation message appears, press [2] to select “Yes”.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the menu screens

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Delete Album/Delete Pictures

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] [-R] (JPEG)

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

≥ When deleting an album, non-picture files in the album will

also be deleted. (This does not apply to subordinate folders in the album.)

≥ [-R] Available space does not increase even after pictures are

deleted.

Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/ Picture View” (> left). ≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,

then press [OK] after step 3.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Album” or “Delete

Pictures”, then press [OK].

5 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

Notes

≥ If you want to delete sample pictures, perform “Cancel

Protection” and then delete them. (> 49)

VQT2J27

Still Pictures and Music—Editing

Enter Album Name

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/ Picture View” (> 53). ≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,

then press [OK] after step 3.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Album Name”, then

press [OK].

– You can give a name for the album (> 47, Entering

Tex t) .

Notes

≥ Album names entered using this unit may not be displayed

on other equipment.

Change Date

[HDD] [RAM] You can change the date of this picture. Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/ Picture View” (> 53). ≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,

then press [OK] after step 3.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Change Date”, then press

[OK].

5 Press [2, 1] to select the item, then press [3, 4] to

change.

6 Press [OK].

Copy to DVD/Copy to HDD

[HDD] [RAM]

Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/ Picture View” (> 53).

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to DVD” or “Copy to

HDD”, then press [OK].

For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD

Press [2, 1] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only”, then press [OK].

Notes

≥ When copying to DVD-R, use blank discs or unfinalised

discs on which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Properties

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] [SD]

Information (e.g., image size and file size) is shown. Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/ Picture View” (> 53).

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then press [OK].

≥ To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].

Set up Protection/Cancel Protection

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] Set protection to prevent pictures from being accidentally deleted.

Perform steps 1 – 3 of “Accessing the Album (still picture)/ Picture View” (> 53). ≥ When editing an album, press [3, 4] to select “Edit Album”,

then press [OK] after step 3.

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Set up Protection” or “Cancel

otection”, then press [OK].

5 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

– The lock symbol “ ” appears when the still picture or

album is protected.

Notes

≥ Even if you set protection using this unit, album may be

deleted by other equipment.

VQT2J27

Accessing the Album and Track View

Enter Album Name

Repeat Play Setting

Sort

Track View

Delete Album

Album and Track Operation (> below)

Useful functions during music play (> 42)

Album and Track Operation (> below)

You can go back to Album View

[HDD]

Preparation:

≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

– When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow”

button to select “MUSIC”.

Editing an album

Press [3, 4] to select the album, then press [OPTION].

Editing a track

1. Press [3, 4] to select the album, then press [OK].

5 2.Press [3, 4] to select the track, then press

[OPTION].

3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation, then press [OK].

To edit the album (Music)

> below

To edit the track (Music)

Delete Track

Properties

Enter Track Name

Enter Artist Name

Repeat Play Setting

Album View

Useful functions during music play > 42

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].

Album and Track Operation

After performing steps 1 – 3 (> above)

Delete Album Delete Track

Enter Album Name Enter Track Name

Enter Artist Name You can edit the artist name of the

Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then press [OK]. ≥ Once deleted, the recorded contents

are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.

You can give names to albums and tracks. (> 47, Entering Text)

track. (> 47, Entering Text)

Deleting still pictures and music using DELETE Navigator

Preparation:

≥ [RAM] [SD] Release protection ( > 70, Setting Protection)

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] [-R] (JPEG)

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD

drive.

2 Press FUNCTION MENU. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or “Music”, then

press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others Drive Select

RETURN

Remain 30:00 SP

Video

Picture

Music

DELETE Navigator Album View

HDD

002

001

10/ 10/ 10 Total 5

10/ 10/ 10 Total 3

- - -

Page 01/0 1

OPTION

RETURN

VIDEO

PICTURE

- - -

Press OK to show

Select

pictures.

Deleting an album:

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item, then press [DELETE ¢].

Deleting a still picture or track:

1. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album which

contains the still picture or track to delete, then press [OK].

2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or

track, then press [OK].

6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

Notes

≥ You cannot delete while recording or copying.

Tips

To view other pages [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing [Album (still picture) and still picture only]

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel. – [HDD] [RAM] [SD] Deleting an item increases the available

space by the amount of space taken by the item deleted.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

MUSIC

Notes

≥ When the timer recording starts, “Delete Album” and “Delete

Track” stops on the way.

≥ “Sample Music” is not displayed on the MUSIC screen.

VQT2J27

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Picture)

Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture Still picture

Album 1 Album 2

Playlist (Picture)

Still picture Still picture Still picture

(> 52, Edit)

(> 57, Start Slideshow/Slideshow Settings)

Album (still picture)/Picture Operations (> 53)

Creating, Editing and Playing Playlists (Video) (> 51)

Properties

Add Pictures

Move Pictures

Delete Pictures

Playlist View

Editing still pictures (> 57)

You can go back to Playlist View ( Picture ).

[HDD]

You can create Playlists (Picture) by grouping your favourite still pictures in albums stored on HDD and edit the Playlists (Picture).

Tips

A Playlist (Picture) is a compilation of your favourite still pictures as shown in the chart below.

Copying (> 58) a Playlist (Picture) will create an album. (Background Music cannot be copied.) ≥Editing still pictures in a Playlist (Picture) doesn’t modify source

albums or source still pictures.

≥Playlists (Picture) are not recorded separately so this doesn’t

use much capacity.

Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View

Preparation:

≥ Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.

With the unit stopped

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists”, then press [OK].

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

Remain

Playlists Flexible Rec DV Auto Rec HDD Management Setup

30:00 SP

When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”.

To p lay Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlist (Picture) to play, then press [OK].

To create Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”, then press [OK] (> right, Creating Playlists (Picture)).

To edit a Playlist (Picture) Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the Playlist (Picture), then press [OPTION].

– Multiple editing (> 57, Tips in “Editing Playlists

(Picture)”)

Start Slideshow

Slideshow Settings

Delete

Edit

Copy to DVD

Album View

VIDEO

Create

Copy

Enter Playlist Name

FUNCTION MENU

HDD

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

Remain

Playlists

Flexible Rec DV Auto Rec HDD Management Setup

30:00 SP

To edit a still picture 1 Select the Playlist (Picture) which contains still

pictures to edit, then press [OK].

2 Select the still pictures to edit, then press

[OPTION].

– Multiple editing (> 57, Tips in “Editing still pictures”)

Creating Playlists (Picture)

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View”. (> left)

5 Press [2, 1] to select an album (a folder) in “Source

Albums”, then press [4].

– Press [OK] to select all still pictures in the album, then

skip to step 8.

–Press [3] to cancel.

6 Press [2, 1] to select the still picture you want to

add to a Playlist (Picture), then press [;].

– A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you

select all necessary items.

–Press [;] again to cancel.

7 Press [OK]. 8 Press [2, 1] to select the position to insert the still

picture, then press [OK].

–Press [3] to select other “Source Albums”, then repeat

steps 5–8 to add pictures in other albums.

9 Press [RETURN ]. : Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” if you want to name the

Playlist (Picture).

– Entering Text > 47

; Select the Background Music if you want to change

Background Music.

– If “No” is selected, Sample Music is set for Background Music.

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of Background

Music, then press [OK]. ≥“Sample Music” is Background Music pre-installed on

HDD.

3 Press [3, 4] to select an album for Background Music, then

press [OK] when selecting other than “Sample Music”. ≥Background Music on Playlists (Picture) can be specified

for each Playlist (Picture). (> 57)

All the selected pictures become a Playlist (Picture).

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Notes

≥ Playlists (Picture) cannot be created or edited while

recording or copying.

≥ You are allowed a maximum of 99 Playlists (Picture), with

approximately 3000 pictures per Playlist (Picture).

VQT2J27

Editing Playlists (Picture)

Start Slideshow

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture)

View”. (> 56)

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow”, then press

[OK].

(> 40, Start Slideshow, Steps 1-2)

Notes

≥You cannot select multiple Playlists (Picture) or all Playlists

(Picture).

Slideshow Settings

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture)

View”. (> 56)

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Settings”, then

press [OK].

(> 41, Slideshow Settings)

Notes

≥Slideshow Settings are retained only for the specified Playlist

(Picture).

≥Music CD (CD-DA) is used for Background Music when inserting

Music CD.

Copy to DVD

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View”

(> 56).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy to DVD”, then press

[OK]. For copy to DVD-RAM

Press [2, 1] to select “Start”, then press [OK]. For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only”, then press [OK].

Notes

≥When copying to DVD-R, use blank discs or unfinalised discs on

which JPEG images are recorded with this unit.

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete, Copy to DVD, Copy) Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

Delete

Use to delete unneeded Playlists (Picture).

Important: Once deleted, Playlist (Picture) contents cannot be recovered (still pictures are not affected).

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture)

View”. (> 56)

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to

confirm.

Tips

To delete during play

1. Press [DELETE ¢]. A confirmation message displays.

2. Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press [OK] to confirm.

Edit

You can create and copy Playlists (Picture).

Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View” (> 56).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4] to select desired operation from the

menu displayed location, then press [OK] (> below).

Create 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create”, then

Copy 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then

Enter Playlist Name

press [OK]. (> 56, Creating Playlists (Picture))

press [OK].

2 Press [2] to select “Copy”, then press

[OK].

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Playlist

Name”, then press [OK].

2 Enter a name for the Playlist (Picture).

(> 47, Entering Text).

Editing still pictures

You can add, move or delete still pictures in the Playlist (Picture). Perform steps 1 – of “Accessing the Playlist (Picture) View”

(> 56).

5 Press [3, 4] to select desired operation from the

menu displayed location, then press [OK] (> below).

Properties 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then

press [OK]. (> 53, Album (still picture)/ Picture Operations)

Add Pictures 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add Pictures”,

then press [OK]. (> 56, Creating Playlists (Picture))

Move Pictures 1 Press [3, 4] to select “Move Pictures”,

then press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

position to insert the still picture, then press [OK].

Delete Pictures

Playlists Move Pictures

HDD

Playlist Name

Playlist 01

0002

0001

0:10.24

Previous Page 001/001 Next

RETURN

---- ----

---- -------- ---

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete Pictures”,

then press [OK].

PICTURE

2 Press [2] to select “Delete”, then press

[OK].

Tips

To exit the menu screens

Press [EXIT].

To view other pages

Press [3,4,2,1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

Multiple editing

(Only Delete Pictures) Select with [3, 4, 2, 1], then press [;]. (Repeat.) – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

VQT2J27

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

Advanced Copy

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult settings. (> 60)

Make a copy list and then copy. You can set the unit to copy titles or Playlists (Video) in the way you want. (> 61)

With this unit, you can select a copy method from the two types listed below. (About copying still pictures > 65)

Features

Copy direction HDD > DVD

DVD > HDD

High speed mode copy (> below, Important)

Changing recording mode

Finalise

§3

Copying Video (MPEG2) from an SD Card (> 63)

Copying Playlists (Video)

Are chapters maintained?

Are thumbnails maintained?

Recording or Playing while Copying

Important

§1

To high speed copy titles (or Playlists (Video) created from those titles), set “Recording Format” to “Video format” before recording to the HDD (The default setting is “Video format”. > 74). However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.

≥Playlists (Video) created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode. ≥Playlists (Video) mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.) ≥Titles that contain many deleted segments ≥Titles that have been copied to the HDD from an SD card or a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD (SD Video) ≥When making a copy of multiple titles that were recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format” and “VR format”

≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode (Displayed > 59) ≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect ≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V› ] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

§2

If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent against degradation of picture quality.) [+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

§3

You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”. If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (> 70).

§4

You cannot copy Playlists (Video) with a play time more than 8 hours. When you copy a Playlists (Video) it will become a title in the destination drive.

§5

[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW]: One title becomes one chapter. [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R]: Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5-minute chapters [+R] about 8-minute chapters) when

finalising after copying the disc.

§6

Thumbnails return to the default position.

§7

When copying Playlists (Video), the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.

§8

It is possible to record programmes to the HDD or playback the titles or Playlists(Video) on the HDD. [However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation or when copying SD Video from an SD card.] –You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying. –You cannot play a Playlists (Video) while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (> 24). –Still pictures or music cannot be played.

§1

§4

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] Advanced Copy

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+ R]DL]

High speed mode Normal speed mode High speed mode Normal speed mode

Advanced Copy

≤≤

–

[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]

≤

[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)

[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy

≤

with finalised discs. [+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.

–

§2

≤

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Automatically finalised

––

[HDD] [RAM] only

Can be selected

≤

–

––≤≤

≤ ≤

§5

–

§6

–

––

≤ ≤

≤

§7

§8

§5

–

§6

–

≤: Can do, –: Cannot do

VQT2J27

∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)

(excludes time required to write data management information)

HDD

Recording

Mode

XP SP LP

EP (6 hours)

EP (8 hours)

Recorded

1 hour

5X Speed

DVD-RAM

Required

time

12 min. 5x

6 min. 10x 3 min. 20x 2 min. 30x

1 min. 30 s.

Speed

40x

12X Speed

DVD-R

Required

time

5 min. 46 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 21 s.

58 s. 62x 48 s. 75x

Speed

10x 24x 44x

4X Speed

DVD-R DL

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 53 s.

Speed

8x 16x 24x 32x

4X Speed

DVD-RW

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s. 2 min. 30 s. 1 min. 57 s.

Speed

8x 16x 24x 31x

8X Speed

Required

time

8 min. 20 s. 3 min. 45 s. 1 min. 53 s.

Speed

7x 16x 32x

4X Speed

+R DL

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.

Speed

4x 8x

16x

4X Speed

+RW

Required

time

15 min. 7 min. 30 s. 3 min. 45 s.

Speed

4x 8x

16x

≥The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying one-hour title from HDD to each disc in the

above list supporting High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is written or unique feature on the disc.

§1

In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc takes.

§2

In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL take.

§3

In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc takes.

§4

In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc takes.

Notes

≥ When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed. ≥ Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed. ≥ When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the

sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal. If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal (Silent)” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 74).

Copy restrictions

Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)

When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL. The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted. You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.

– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When

copying to a new blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent of up to 4 hours of free

Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording”

You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 96) compatible DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD. ≥ Titles or Playlists (Video) cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to

the HDD.

≥ Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 49). ≥ You cannot copy Playlists (Video) created from “One time

only recording” titles.

≥ Titles with recording limitations and Playlists (Video) cannot

be registered on the same copying list.

space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)

– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the

number of titles to be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is

greater than 499 in total. When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 15)

COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions

The following icons give more information about copy restrictions of the title.

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW

Titles and Playlists (Video) that can be copied in high speed mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) (However, titles and Playlists (Video) cannot be copied in high speed mode to +R or +RW)

[+R]DL]

is displayed, but copy cannot be

(NTSC) (PAL)

performed, even in normal speed mode.

Title with “One time only recording” restriction (> 24, Copy-once recording)

Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only recording” restriction after copying. (> 24, Copyonce recording)

Title or Playlists (Video) contains still picture(s) ≥ Still picture(s) cannot be copied.

Title or Playlists (Video) recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV system currently selected on the unit. ≥ Titles and Playlists (Video) displaying these

marks cannot be selected.

VQT2J27

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

Before copying

Speed and recording mode when copying

[HDD] ,-. [RAM]: High speed [HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: Refer to the

following table.

“Recording Format” setting (> 74) Copy speed

Only titles recorded with “Recording Format” set to “VR format.

Only titles recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format”.

When making a copy of multiple titles that were recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format” and “VR format”.

In the following cases, even if “Recording Format” is set to

High speed

Normal speed

“Video format”, copy will perform at normal speed. ≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in

“EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough

space.

≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V› ] copying source was recorded in “EP”

or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.

Preparation:

≥ Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 15, 82). ≥ Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.

≥ Titles and Playlists (Video) recorded using a different

encoding system (PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit cannot be copied.

≥ [-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures (JPEG)

already recorded on it.

≥ [-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video

already recorded on it.

Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]

DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL are automatically finalised (> 96). After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R] DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] (You cannot copy to finalised discs.)

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to DVD)”, then

press [OK].

COPY Navigator All Titles

Rec time 0:52(SP)

HDD

RETURN

Total : 0

Channel

001

BBC 26/9 FRI 13:30

002

BBC1 27/9 SAT 12:15

003

AV2 3/10 FRI 20:00

004

BBC 3/10 FRI 22:05

005

AV2 4/10 SAT 16:10

006

BBC2 10/10 FRI 9:25

007

BBC 10/10 FRI 13:30

008

BBC 11/10 SAT 21:00

---

OPTION

4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you want to copy, then

press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel.

5 Press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

Date Day

Page 01/01

Select

Info

Disc Space: 4310MB

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

Title NameTimeNo.

Notes

≥ When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set

to FR. (However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode, copy will not be performed.)

Check the properties of a title and sort COPY Navigator

Perform steps 1–3 of “Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]”.

4 Press [3, 4] to select the title, then press [OPTION].

COPY Navigator All Titles

Rec time 0:52(SP)

HDD

RETURN

Total : 0

001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008

---

Properties

Sort

Grouped Titles

Channel

Disc Space: 4310MB

Total Size: 0MB( 0%)

Time No.

Date Day

BBC 26/9 FRI 13:30 BBC1 27/9 SAT 12:15 AV2 3/10 FRI 20:00 BBC 3/10 FRI 22:05 AV2 4/10 SAT 16:10 BBC2 10/10 FRI 9:25 BBC 10/10 FRI 13:30 BBC 11/10 SAT 21:00

Page 01/01

Title Name

Properties Press [3, 4] to select “Properties”, then

press [OK].

The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are shown. ≥ [HDD] You can also press [STATUS ] to

display the “Properties” screen when a title with “ Info” on the bottom of the All Titles or Grouped Titles screen is selected.

Sort

(All Titles screen only)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort”, then press

[OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select the item, then

press [OK].

This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check mark.) If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is cancelled.

Notes

≥ If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from

the title at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them. To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and then copy the contents of the list (> 61).

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To stop copying (> 62) COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions (> 59)

VQT2J27

Copying using the copying list —Advanced Copy

[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] > [HDD] [HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [SD] > [HDD] [RAM]

You can order titles and Playlists (Video) as desired for copy to disc.

See also “Before copying” (> 60).

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced Copy”, then press

[OK].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

VIDEO High Speed

Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

– If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]

several times (> step 7).

4 Set the copy direction.

– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [4]

(> step 5).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination”, then press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive, then press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the recording mode.

– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]

(> step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “VIDEO”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode”, then press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the mode, then press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to confirm.

6 Register titles and Playlists (Video) for copy.

– If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

VIDEO High Speed

Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK]. 3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the “Blue”

button to select “Playlists”.

Create List All Titles

HDD

007

BBC 1 10/10 FRI

Previous Page 02/02 Next

RETURN

OPTION

008

BBC 1 11/10 SAT

OPTION

Source

Destination

Select the copy direction.

HDD

DVD

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

Size: 0MB

Name of item

No. Size

New item (Total=0)

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

VIDEO

- - -

0:30(XP)

- - - - - - - - -

Select

( 0%)

Playlists

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or Playlists (Video),

then press [;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. – Press [;] again to cancel. – The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

– When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,

the check mark is cancelled.

– When copying to a disc using high speed mode,

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “ ” or “ ” can be registered.

[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]: only items indicated with “ ” can be registered.

– To view other pages (> 58)

5 Press [OK] to confirm.

– To edit the copying list (> below)

You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity” is not sufficient) (> 62, About the data size for copying).

6 Press [2] to confirm.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press

[OK].

8 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start

copying.

[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-R W ‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only”, then press [OK].

– If “Copy & Finalise” is selected

After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.

Notes

≥ It is not possible to copy to DVD-R that already contains

JPEG files.

Edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5 (> above)

6–6 Press [OPTION].

Delete All Delete all items registered on the

copying list.

1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete All”,

then press [OK].

2. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then

press [OK].

Add Add new items to the copying list.

1. Press [3, 4] to select “Add”, then

press [OK].

2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the

title or Playlists (Video), then press [;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

3. Press [OK].

Delete Delete the selected items.

1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”,

then press [OK].

2. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then

press [OK].

Move Move selected items or change the

order of items on the copying list.

1. Press [3, 4] to select “Move”, then

press [OK].

2. Press [3, 4] to select the

destination, then press [OK].

Delete All

Add

Delete

Move

VQT2J27

Copying titles or Playlists (Video)

Page 01/01

Create copy list.

Size: 0MB

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

New item (Total=0)

(0%)

No. Size

Name of item

Copy

min.

hour

Cancel All

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Copy Time

DVD HDD

DVD-Video XP

Set the time a few minutes longer.

Cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 61)

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK]. 5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

≥ The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following

situations. – When a title or playlist (Video), etc. has been recorded or

deleted at the copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the

unit, remove the card, open the tray, change the copy

direction, etc.

About the data size for copying

Data size of each registered item

Data size recorded to the copy destination ≥ When copying at normal speed, the

total data size will change according to the recording mode.

≥ The total data size shown may be

larger than the sum of the data sizes for each registered item, because of data management information being written to the copy destination, etc.

Tips

To view other pages

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.

Multiple editing

Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.) Press [OK] to register to the list. – A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds. (You cannot stop while finalising)

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Recording and playing while copying

You can record or play using the HDD while high speed copying. (Only when high speed copying without finalising) – Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be

played. Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.

– To confirm the current progress

Press [STATUS ].

Notes

When you stop High-speed copying

All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

When you stop Normal Speed copying

Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with “One time only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain on the HDD. – [-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while

temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied. However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point cancelled are copied.

Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining writable disc space becomes less.

≥ Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to

the HDD regardless of the recording drive settings. (Only when high speed copying without finalising)

≥ To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),

+R and +R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.

Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL

[DVD-V] > [HDD] You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVDRW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit. While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD according to the set time

≥ Operations and on-screen displays during copy are also

recorded.

≥ Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent

illegal copying, and cannot be copied.

Preparation:

≥ Insert the finalised disc (> 82).

After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-Video”) (> 61, Copying using the copying list — Advanced Copy)

6 Set “Copy Time”.

– If you are not going to change the setting (> step 7).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting”, then press [OK].

– Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [2] to confirm.

Copy will continue until there is not enough available recording space on the HDD.

– Setting the unit to copy according to the set time

3 Press [3, 4] to select “On”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time”, then press [OK].

VQT2J27

5 Press [2, 1] to select “hour” and “min.”, then press [3, 4]

to set the recording time.

6 Press [OK].

7 Press [2] to confirm.

My favourite 01/02

01 Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3 Chapter 4

SD Card

Copy New Pictures (JPEG)

Copy Video (MPEG2) View Pictures (JPEG) Start Slideshow

USB device

Play Video ( DivX ) Copy Video ( MPEG2 )

Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the content being played finishes.

– Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to include

the operation time before play begins.

– You can also set the recording time with the numbered buttons.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press

[OK].

Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start copying. The disc top menu is displayed.

– Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is

selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising the disc (> 71).

8 When the top menu is displayed

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title you want to start copying, then press [OK].

While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is reached.)

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To stop copying

Press [∫]. You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop copying.

≥ If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.

Notes

≥ If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while

copying, that portion of title is not recorded.

≥ The screen on the right is recorded at the beginning. ≥ The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of copy to

the end.

≥ If play does not begin automatically or if

the top menu does not display automatically, press [1] (PLAY) to start.

≥ Even if you copy a high quality video/audio

DVD, the original picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.

≥ If you want to copy a title from a finalised

DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 61, Copying using the copying list — Advanced Copy).

Copying Video (MPEG2) from an SD Card

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been taken by a Panasonic SD Video Camera, digital video camera etc, can be stored on HDD or DVD-RAM. (All the recordings on the same date become a title.) ≥ You cannot playback SD Video on an SD card with this unit.

You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

≥ You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video. ≥ This unit cannot copy MOTION JPEG format pictures or

AVCHD format pictures from an SD card.

Video (MPEG2)

HDD

DVD-RAM



DVD Video Recording format

VIDEO



The display below automatically appears when you insert a card into the SD card slot while stopped.

Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”, then press [OK].

Then go to step 7 on page 61

≥ SD Video on an SD card are automatically registered on the

copying list.

≥ If there are no SD Video on an SD card, “Copy Video

( MPEG2 )” is not displayed.

Copy Video ( MPEG2 ) from a video equipment

Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM. (All the recordings on the same date become a title.) ≥ You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this

unit. You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.

≥ You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.

Video (MPEG2)

USB cable



DVD Video Recording format

Preparation:

1. Turn on both this unit and the camera.

2. Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.

3. Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.

≥ Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.

The display automatically appears when you connect the camera to this unit. (> 38)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (DivX & MPEG2)”, then

press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”, then

press [OK].

Then go to step 7 on page 61.

≥ SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the

copy list.

≥ If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video

( MPEG2 )” is not displayed.

VIDEO



HDD

DVD-RAM

VQT2J27

Copying Still Pictures/Playlist (Picture)

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Picture

Copy Direction

Copy Mode

Picture/Folder

HDD DVD

PICTURE

High Speed

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

Copy

Destination Capacity: 4343MB

No. Size

Cancel All

Picture

Copy Direction

Picture/Folder

HDD DVD

Name of item

New item (Total=0)

Folder

New folder

001 100__DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD

---

New folder

VQT2J27

≥ SDHC Memory Cards used for recording with this unit can

only be used with other SDHC Memory Card-compatible equipment. SDHC Memory Cards cannot be used with equipment that is only compatible with SD Memory Cards.

≥ You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or

CD-R/CD-RW.

≥ When you copy a Playlist (Picture), it will become an album in

the destination drive.

Copying using the copying list

[HDD] [RAM] [SD] ,-. [HDD] [RAM] [SD] [HDD] [SD] > [-R] (JPEG)

1 While stopped

Press [FUNCTION MENU].

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced Copy”, then press

[OK].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

HDD DVD

Copy Mode

PICTURE

High Speed

Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

– If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]

several times (> step 7).

4 Set the copy direction.

– If you are not going to change the copying direction, press [4]

(> step 5).

The same drive as the copy source can be selected.

6 Press [2] to confirm.

5 Set the copy mode.

– If you are not going to change the recording mode, press [4]

(> step 6).

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE”, then press [OK].

“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.

4 Press [2] to confirm.

6 Register still pictures and Playlists (Picture) for copy.

– If you are going to copy a registered list without making any

changes to it (> step 7).

You can register still pictures or still picture folders or Playlists (Picture). – Individual still pictures and folders/Playlists (Picture) cannot be

registered on the same list.

To register individual still pictures

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK]. 3 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM] [SD]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”. Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture, then press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥When you switch between the “PICTURE” and “Playlists”

tab, the check mark is cancelled.

≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a

time. – To view other pages (> 65) – To select another folder or Playlists (Picture) (> 65)

5 Press [OK] to confirm.

– To edit the copying list (> right)

6 Press [2] to confirm.

Source

Destination

HDD

DVD

Select the copy direction.

To register on a folder by folder basis (To register Playlists (Picture))

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder”, then press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4

HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM] [SD]

5 [

] to select “New item”, then press [OK].

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE” Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

6 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlists (Picture), then

press [;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

– To view other pages (> 65)

7 Press [OK] to confirm.

– To edit the copying list (> below)

8 Repeat steps 4–7 until you select all necessary folders

(Playlists (Picture)).

9 Press [2] to confirm.

7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press

[OK].

≥Only when copying individual still pictures

Except for [SD] > [HDD] [RAM] When specifying another folder as the copying destination, select “Folder”.

- -

8 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK] to start

copying.

9 For copy to DVD-R

Press [2, 1] to select “Copy & Finalise” or “Copy Only”, then press [OK] to start copying.

Edit the copying list

Select the item in step 6–5 (for a still picture) (> left) or 6–7 (for a folder or Playlist (Picture)) (> above)

6–6 Press [OPTION].

or 6–8 Press [OPTION].

Delete All

Add

Delete

Delete All Delete all items registered on the copying list.

1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete All”, then press

[OK].

2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Add Add new items to the copying list.

1. Press [3, 4] to select “Add”, then press [OK].

2. Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder to be added, then press [;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel.

3. Press [OK].

Delete Delete the selected items.

1. Press [3, 4] to select “Delete”, then press [OK].

2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Copy All Pictures

Copy from

USB

Copy to

HDD

Copy all pictures ( JPEG ) by date.

Cancel all registered copying setting and lists

After performing steps 1–3 (> 64) 4 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK]. 5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following

situations. – When a title, Playlist (Picture), still picture, etc. has been

recorded or deleted at the copy source

– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the

unit, remove the card, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To view other pages or Playlist (Picture)

Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next”, then press [OK]. – You can also press [:, 9] to view other pages.

To select another folder or Playlist (Picture)

After performing step 6–2 (> 64, To register individual still pictures) 1 [HDD] >[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM] [SD]

Press the “Green” button to select “PICTURE”. Press the “Blue” button to select “Playlists”.

2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the “Folder”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder or Playlists (Picture), then

press [OK].

Create List Picture (JPEG)

HDD

Folder 103__DVD

0002

0001

----

RETURN

0003

----

---- ---- ----

Page

001/001

OPTION

PICTURE

0004

--------

Playlists

Create List

HDD

RETURN

\DCIM\100__DVD 001 100__DVD 002 101__DVD 003 102__DVD 004 103__DVD

---

OPTION

Folder

PICTURE

Page 01/01

Picture 0012 File 0012

Playlists

You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.

≥ Individual still pictures of different folders (Playlists

(Picture)) cannot be registered on the same list.

≥

It is convenient to create a Playlist (Picture) (>56) if you want to register still pictures of different folders on HDD in the same list.

Notes

≥ The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on

the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥ Still pictures copied from SD cards are grouped by the

shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number

of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 18), copying will stop partway through.

≥ You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation. ≥ [-R] Video cannot be copied to a disc with still pictures

(JPEG) already recorded on it.

≥ [-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with

video already recorded on it.

Copying new still pictures on the SD card or USB memory—Copy New Pictures

[USB] [SD] > [HDD] This unit saves information about imported still pictures. Therefore, if still pictures are imported from the same SD card, or USB memory then only new still pictures will be imported.

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory/SD card. (> 82).

The menu is automatically displayed.

2 [USB]

Press [3, 4] to select “Picture ( JPEG )”, then press [OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy New Pictures ( JPEG )”,

then press [OK].

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].

(> 38)

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Notes

≥

This unit saves the information on up to 12,000 still pictures and 30 SD cards for SD media and up to 12,000 still pictures and all USB memories for USB device. If additional still pictures are imported, then the older information will be deleted.

≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number

of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 18), copying will stop partway through.

≥ You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation. ≥

Only DCF-compliant USB media can be used for this function.

≥ Still pictures copied from USB memories or SD cards are

grouped by the shooting date in the HDD .

Copying still pictures on the USB memory

Copying all the still pictures

[USB] > [HDD]

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (> 82).

The menu is automatically displayed.

Press [3,4] to select “Picture ( JPEG )”, then press [OK].

(> 38)

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )”,

then press [OK].

4 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].

Copying using the copying list

[USB] > [HDD] [RAM] [SD]

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory (> 82).

The menu is automatically displayed.

(> 38)

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture ( JPEG )”, then press

[OK].

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Selected Pictures

( JPEG )”, then press [OK].

Copy

Cancel All

Copy Direction

USB HDD

Copy Mode

PICTURE

Create List

Start Copying

RETURN

High Speed

Source

USB

Destination

HDD

Select the copy direction.

4 Perform steps 4–8 on “Copying using the copying

list”. (> 64)

≥ Another folder cannot be selected as the copying

destination on step 7.

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

Notes

≥ Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”. ≥ The structure of folders on the USB memory may not

be the same at the copy destination.

≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the

number of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 18), copying will stop partway through.

≥

You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.

≥ Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped

by the shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.

VQT2J27

Copying music to HDD

You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.

Music CD (CD-DA)

When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal Gracenote

Database to obtain title information. The album name, track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you find the track easily when playing back.

MP3/WMA

You can copy MP3 or WMA files from the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL.

About the Gracenote® Database

The Gracenote retrieve CD title information. When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted CD. The Gracenote titles and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal database. This unit has an internal database containing information for approximately 350,000 album titles. You can update the internal database (> 67).

If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found, then track name, and artist name will be blank. In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after recording to the HDD has completed.

Database is a database used to search and

Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so

Copying music from a CD

[CD] > [HDD] All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD. (Cannot record track-by-track.)

≥ One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album. ≥ Audio quality: LPCM ≥ The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300

(Depends on the remaining capacity.) If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that can be recorded will be reduced.

Preparation:

Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.

1 Insert a music CD.

The menu is automatically displayed.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”, then press

[OK].

The unit starts accessing the Gracenote

Database and searches for the title information. – If search results indicate that multiple titles were found

Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title, then press [OK].

3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy”, then press [OK].

Recording starts.

Tips

To stop recording

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds. ≥ The recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be

recorded.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Notes

≥ While copying, no other operations can be performed. Timer

recordings will not proceed.

≥ Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a

disc, USB memory or SD card.

≥ CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)

restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.

Copying music from a USB memory or CDR/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL

[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3/WMA)

You can copy MP3 or WMA files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.

≥ One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group. ≥ The maximum number of albums

The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000 (Depends on the remaining capacity.)

≥ If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums

that can be recorded will be reduced.

Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be treated as albums.

1 While stopped

Insert the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVDR DL (> 82).

The menu is automatically displayed.

2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )”,

then press [OK].

“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to “USB>HDD”, “DVD>HDD” or “CD>HDD” and “MUSIC High Speed”, respectively.

3 Register MP3 or WMA files for copy.

You can register MP3/WMA files or file folders. – MP3/WMA files and folders cannot be registered on the

same list.

To register individual MP3/WMA files

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file, then press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

5 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 67)

6 Press [2] to confirm.

To register on a folder by folder basis

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List”, then press [1]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item”, then press [OK]. 5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [;].

A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items.

≥Press [;] again to cancel. ≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If

you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at a time.

6 Press [OK].

≥To edit the copying list (> 67)

7 Press [2] to confirm.

> [HDD]

on HDD: 300

(> 38)

VQT2J27

4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Copying”, then press

[OK]. For individual files only

≥When specifying an existing folder as the copying

destination

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder”, then press [OK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder, then press [OK].

≥When creating a new folder as the copying destination

1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK]. 2 Enter the folder name (> 47, Entering Text).

5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Tips

To stop copying

Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

Notes

≥ The sequence in which the MP3/WMA files are registered

on the copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.

≥ If MP3/WMA files are already contained inside the copy

destination folder, the new MP3/WMA files are recorded following the existing MP3/WMA files.

≥ If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number

of files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 18), copying will stop partway through.

To edit the copying list

Select the item in step 3 – 5 (for a MP3/WMA file) or 3 – 6 (for a folder). (> 66, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/ CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)

1 Press [OPTION]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation, then press [OK].

Delete All:

Delete all items registered on the copying list. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Add:

Add new items to the copying list. 1 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file or folder, then press

[;]. A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all necessary items. ≥Press [;] again to cancel selection.

2 Press [OK].

Delete:

Delete the selected items. Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

To cancel all registered copying settings and lists

After performing steps 1 – 2 (> 66, Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)

1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All”, then press [OK]. 2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following

situations. – When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source – When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,

remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.

To update Gracenote® Database

To update the database with information on CDs that were recently released, follow the instructions below.

Preparing the update data

1 Visit the following website.

http://panasonic.net/avc/support/gn/

2 Download the data to your USB memory.

≥ USB memory 1 GB or larger is required. ≥ Refer to the instruction on the website for more

information.

Updating the database on this unit

3 Turn on this unit. 4 Insert the USB memory (> 82).

The menu is automatically displayed.

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD”,

then press [OK].

6 Press [2, 1] to select “Update”, then press [OK].

≥ Updating takes up to 20 minutes. ≥ Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains

lead while updating.

≥ Once started, you cannot cancel updating. A message

appears when updating is finished.

7 Press [OK].

Notes

≥ Timer recordings do not start while updating. ≥ Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly

regardless of whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make sure you download the latest version from the website.

≥ Some of the CD title information in the database may be

deleted after updating the database.

≥ No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the

CD title information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the CD title information of that CD is added to the database by updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)

≥ Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote,

upgrading the Gracenote through the Web may be discontinued without notice.

Database and providing it

VQT2J27

Setting On-Screen Display

Setting Menus

Accessing the On-Screen Display

When playing discs (except for JPEG discs), you can display and set the options including disc audio, subtitle, image quality, sound effect, Repeat Play, etc. In addition, when receiving the multi-audio broadcast, you can change the audio settings. Menu options will differ based on disc type and contents.

1 Press [DISPLAY].

Menu Item Setting

2 Press [3, 4] to select a menu, then press [1]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select an item, then press [1]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select a setting.

Follow the on-screen prompts to change individual settings.

Notes

≥ Some settings may not be changeable, based on the unit’s

current activity (playing, stopped, etc.) and disc contents.

Tips

To exit the on-screen display

Press [DISPLAY].

Disc Menu

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR ›] [VCD] and DivX

You can change the settings of disc audio, subtitle, etc.

Soundtrack

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] The disc’s audio attributes appear (> below, Audio attributes).

[DVD-V]

Select the audio and language (> below, Audio attributes, Soundtrack/Subtitle language). [VCD] (SVCD) and DivX Select the soundtrack number. ≥ Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only

one audio type.

Subtitles

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (On

ly discs that contain subtitle on/off information)

Turn the subtitle on/off. ≥ Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.

[DVD-V]

Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> below, Soundtrack/Subtitle language). [VCD] (SVCD) and DivX Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number. ≥ “Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not

multiple subtitles.

Audio channel

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX Change audio during playback. LR / L / R

Source Select (DivX)

≥Automatic: The constructing method of the DivX contents is

≥Interlace: Select when the disc contents were recorded

≥Progressive: Select when the disc contents were recorded

Angle

[DVD-V]

Change the number to select an angle.

PBC (Playback control > 96) [VCD]

Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.

automatically distinguished and output.

using interlace.

using progressive.

Soundtrack/Subtitle language

ENG: FRA: DEU: ITA: ESP: NLD: SVE: NOR:

Audio attributes

LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:

k (kHz): b (bit): ch (channel):

English French German Italian Spani sh Dutch Swedish Norwegian

DAN: POR: RUS: JPN: CHI: KOR: MAL: VIE:

Danish Portuguese Russian Japanese Chinese Korean Malay Vietnamese

Signal type Sampling frequency

Number of bits Number of channels

THA: POL: CES: SLK: HUN: FIN: ¢:

Thai Polish Czech Slovak Hungarian Finnish Others

Notes

≥ You cannot make a change when there is no recording. ≥ Some discs allow changes to soundtracks, subtitles, and

angles only by using the disc’s menus (> 20).

VQT2J27

Play Menu

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] [CD] [VCD]

Repeat Play

This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed. Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that can be selected will differ. Select “Off” to cancel.

Picture Menu

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]

You can change the noise reduction setting when playing discs or of images from the connected device.

Playback NR

Reduces noise and picture degradation while playing.

≥ On: Reduces noise and picture degradation. ≥ Off: Video is played back as it is.

Input NR

Reduces the noise while recording.

≥ Automatic: Noise reduction only works on picture input

≥ On: Noise reduction works for any video input. ≥

Off: Noise reduction is off. Select when you want to

from a video tape.

rec

ord input as is.

Sound Menu

You can change the settings of audio when receiving the multiaudio broadcast, and also change the settings of sound effect when playing discs.

DVB Multi Audio

[MPEG Audio only] If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the desired channel before recording. ≥ DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or

recording.

≥ Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected

will differ.

English 1/ English 2

Dialogue Enhancer

[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›] and DivX (Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel) When “On”, the volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue easier to hear.

Other Menu

Position

Change where this menu screen appears on your TV.

VQT2J27

HDD, DVD and Card Management

You can manage discs or cards through formatting, finalising and other operations.

Accessing the Management Menus

Preparation:

≥ [RAM] [SD] Release protection ( > below, “Setting

Protection”).

≥ Insert a disc or card.

With the unit stopped

1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD, DVD or SD

drive.

2 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK].

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

Remain

Playlists Flexible Rec DV Auto Rec

HDD Management

Setup

30:00 SP

4 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD Management”, “DVD

Management” or “Card Management”, then press [OK].

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Naming Discs

[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] You can give a name for the disc. ≥ [-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to

record still images to that disc.

Deleting All Titles

You can delete all titles on HDD or the single-sided DVD-RAM at once.

Important: Once deleted, contents cannot be recovered.

[HDD] [RAM] Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> left).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all titles”, then press

[OK].

6 Pr

ess [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– A message appears when deleting is finished.

8 Press [OK] to complete.

Notes

≥ Deleting does not work if one or more titles are protected. ≥ Still picture data (JPEG), Playlists (Picture), music data or

computer data cannot be deleted.

Formatting Discs or Cards

[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+ RW ] [-RW‹VR›] [+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only) [SD]

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment.

You can record or edit after formatting the finalised DVD-RW. Important: Once formatted, contents cannot be recovered. Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> left).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”, “Format Disc”

or “Format Card”, then press [OK].

6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK]. 7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– Formatting starts ([ RAM] may take up to a maximum of

70 minutes).

– A message appears when formatting is finished.

8 Press [OK] to complete.

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> above).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”, then press [OK].

Entering Text (> 47).

Tips

≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the

name is displayed on the Top Menu.

≥ [+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on

other equipment after creating top menu.

Setting Protection

[RAM]

Use to prevent accidental erasure of disc. Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> above).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Protection”, then press

[OK].

6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

[SD]

Switch the write-protect switch to the “LOCK” position.

LOCK

Notes

≥ Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.

This can render the disc or the card unusable.

≥ When a disc or card has been formatted using this unit, it

may not be possible to use it on any other equipment.

≥ [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed. ≥ [-RW‹V›] [-RW‹VR›] You can format only as DVD-Video format

on this unit.

≥ [SD] The card cannot be formatted if the write protect switch

(> left) is switched to “LOCK”. Release the protection to continue.

≥ The message “Unable to format” appears when trying to

format discs the unit cannot use.

≥ Sample pictures are restored when formatting HDD even if

they have been deleted.

VQT2J27

Selecting the background style—Top Menu

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW ‹V ›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> 70).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the background, then

press [OK].

Top Menu List

Display after finalising

Thumbnail (Still picture)

7 8

Title Name

≥ You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu.

(> 49, Change Thumbnail)

≥ [-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

Notes

≥ Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising. This

can render the disc unusable.

≥ When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it

may take longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately 4 times longer).

≥ After finalising

– [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL ] The disc becomes play-only and

you can no longer record or edit it.

– [-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting

although it becomes play-only after finalising. – When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated. – The disc finalised on the unit may not be playable on

other players depending on the condition of the recording. – There is a pause of several seconds between titles and

chapters during playback. – Chapters are created automatically

([-R] [- RW ‹V ›] about 5-minute chapters

chapters§), if

– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.

– the titles were copied using any mode other than the

high speed mode.

This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode of recording.

[+R] about 8-minute

Selecting Whether to Show the Top Menu First —AutoPlay Select

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW ‹V ›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]

Before finalising a disc, select whether the top menu shows after finalising.

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> 70).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play Select”, then press

[OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Title 1”, then

press [OK].

≥ Top Menu:

The Top Menu appears first.

≥ Title 1:

The disc content is played without displaying the Top Menu.

≥ [-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images

recorded on them.

Finalising

[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW ‹V ›] [+

R] [+R]DL]

You can play these discs on compatible DVD players by finalising it on the unit, effectively making it into DVD-Video that complies with DVD-Video standards. The menu you create with the unit can also be used on most DVD players.

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> 70).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise”, then press [OK]. 6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK]. 7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– Finalising starts and cannot be cancelled (may take up

to 15 minutes) ([-R] DL] [+R]DL] up to 60 minutes)

– A message appears when finalising is finished.

8 Press [OK] to complete.

Tips

≥ After you have finished recording or copying and try to eject

the disc, a screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears (> 26).

Create Top Menu

[+RW]

+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW disc on other equipment.

Perform preparation steps 1–4 of “Accessing the Management Menus” (> 70).

5 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top Menu”, then press

[OK].

6 Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK]. 7 Press [2] to select “Start”, then press [OK].

– “Create Top Menu” cannot be cancelled once started. – “Create Top Menu” takes a few minutes.

8 Press [OK] to complete.

Notes

≥ Recording or editing on the disc may delete the Top Menu.

In that case, create the Top Menu again.

≥ You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.

VQT2J27

Setup Menu

You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.

Channel Settings

Accessing the Setup Menu

With the unit stopped

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].

HDD

FUNCTION MENU

Playback

Recording

Delete

Copy

TV Guide

Others

Drive Select

RETURN

Remain

Playlists Flexible Rec DV Auto Rec HDD Management

Setup

30:00 SP

3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select a menu, then press [1] to

go to the item list.

ItemMenus Options

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound

Display Connection

Others

Remote Control Clock Owner ID Standby Settings DivX Registration System Update Initialize

TAB

SELECT

DVD 1

RETURN

5 Press [3, 4] to select an item to change, then

press [OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select the option, then press [OK].

Notes

≥ Changed settings remain intact even when switching the

unit to standby mode.

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ]. Even if you have changed an option, the change is not activated until you press [OK].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

> Others > Setup

(> left, Accessing the Setup Menu) All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Tuning

3, 4 select “Tuning” > 1 > 3, 4 select item >

Setup

Tuning

Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio DVB Preferred Subtitles

TAB

SELECT

RETURN

English English

Favourites Edit

You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the channel setting itself. ≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourites

during timer recording standby.

≥Channel numbers cannot be changed, due to broadcast

restrictions.

Setup

Tuning

Disc

Picture

Sound

Display

Connection

Others

To select the Favourite Press the “Green” button.

To add channels to a Favourite 1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels”

column to add, then press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to add other channels. ≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the

2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To change the order of channels of a Favourite 1 Press [1] 2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite”

column to move, then press the “Green” button.

3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel,

then press the “Green” button.

≥Repeat the steps 2–3 to move other channels.

4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

To delete channels on a Favourite 1 Press [1] 2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite”

column, then press the “Yellow” button.

≥Repeat this step to delete other channels. ≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the

3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.

Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel itself. You can still select the channel from the “All Channels” column.

To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite” column 1 Press [1] 2 Press the “Red” button. (> 47, Entering Text)

When the station name of the “All Channels” column is highlighted

Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio DVB Preferred Subtitles

SELECT

TAB

RETURN

English English

SELECT

Favourites Editor

All Channels

1 BBC ONE Wales

2 BBC 2W 3 BBC THREE 4 BBC FOUR 5 CBeebies 6 BBC PARLMNT 7 Community 8 CBBC Channel 9 1Xtra BBC

Favourite Select Add All Add

RETURN

Favourite 1

Page + Page –

Favourite. (Only when no channels have been added to the Favourite.)

Favourite.

VQT2J27

DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region

You can restart auto channel setting for digital terrestrial channels if the setup (> 13) fails for some reason.

If you want to set the channel list best suited to your region, select “DVB Auto Setup by Region”. Follow the on-screen instructions to select the region you live in.

However, if you perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” or “DVB Auto Setup by Region”, all channel settings, Favourites and all the timer recording programmes are deleted. (All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID, Clock and remote control code, etc. return to the factory preset.) Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

When the confirmation screen appears

Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Tips

≥You can also use the following method to restart DVB Auto Setup

by Signal Quality. When the unit is turned on and stopped, press and hold [CH W]

and [X CH] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds. – Auto-Setup screen appears.

DVB Manual Tuning

You can set channels manually if the “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” or “DVB Auto Setup by Region” could not be completed successfully.

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection

Others

1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.

2 Press [OK] to start scan.

3 Press [EXIT], then press

Add New DVB Channels

You can search for newly added digital terrestrial channels to receive.

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

– The unit starts searching for newly available digital terrestrial

– The bar over the table shows you the search progress. At the end

– “No new DVB channels found.”, is displayed when no new

Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.

Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio DVB Preferred Subtitles

SELECT

TAB

RETURN

English English

DVB Manual Tuning

Frequency

Signal Quality Signal Strength

No. NewChannel Name Type

TV: 0 Radio: 0 Data: 0

START SCAN

RETURN

[CH54] 010 010

738.0

MHz

– Select the channel by checking the signal strength and signal

quality displays. [Refer to “Signal Condition” (> right) for signal strength and signal quality.]

The set channel is displayed in the table. ≥Repeat steps 1–2 to tune

other channels.

Frequency

Signal Quality Signal Strength

No. NewChannel Name Type

1 2

3 4 5

TV: 15 Radio: 4 Data: 0

START SCAN

RETURN

[CH54] 738,0 010 010

BBC ONE Wales BBC 2W BBC NEWS 24 BBC Radio Wales ITV

8 DVB channels found.

TV TV TV Radio TV

DVB Manual Tuning

[WXCH] to check that applicable channels have been selected.

Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio DVB Preferred Subtitles

SELECT

English English

TAB

RETURN

Add New DVB Channels

Scan CH 21 68

CH Type Quality

27 TV 9 27 TV 9 27 Radio 9

TV: 15 Radio: 4 Data: 0

RETURN

Channel Name

BBC ONE Wales27 TV 9

BBC 2W BBC NEWS 24 BBC Radio Wales

Searching...

channels. This takes about 5 minutes.

of the search, the number of found new digital stations appears.

channels can be found.

MHz

Signal Condition

You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.

When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be selected:

1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen. 2 Press [WXCH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the

unit’s display.

3 Display the Setup menu again.

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound Display Connection Others

Favourites Edit DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality DVB Auto Setup by Region DVB Manual Tuning Add New DVB Channels Signal Condition DVB Preferred Multi Audio DVB Preferred Subtitles

SELECT

English English

TAB

RETURN

DVB Signal Condition

DVB Channel

Signal Quality 010

Signal Strength 010

RETURN

[CH54] 20 BBC ONE Wales

Channel + Channel –

The quality and strength of the signal are shown. Press [WXCH] to select the channel.

Signal Quality

Below 2 (display red) The signal quality is so poor that there

2–5 (display orange) The signal quality is basically adequate,

Over 5 (display green) Optimum picture and sound quality.

may be interference in the pictures and sound.

but brief interference in the pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.

Signal Strength

The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%, “10” means signal strength 100%. ≥If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.

Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.

≥When the signal is weak:

– check that the aerial is correctly positioned. – adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the Setup

menu (> left).

– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly

broadcasting.

– check that your aerial is capable of receiving DVB broadcasts.

DVB Preferred Multi Audio

Choose the audio language for digital broadcast. If the selected language is not available, then the original language will be selected.

] [Welsh] [Gaelic]

[English

DVB Preferred Subtitles

Choose the subtitle language for digital broadcast. If the selected language is not available, then the original language will be selected.

] [Welsh] [Gaelic]

[English [English for hearing impaired] [Welsh for hearing impaired] [Gaelic for hearing impaired]

Tips

To cancel in middle

Press [RETURN ]. The channels found before stopping are not saved.

VQT2J27

Playback/Recording Settings

> Others > Setup

(> 72, Accessing the Setup Menu) All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Disc

3, 4 select “Disc” > 1 > 3, 4 select item

Setup

Tuning

Disc

Picture Sound Display Connection Others

Settings for Playback Settings for Recording

SELECT

TAB

RETURN

Settings for Playback

Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Ratings

Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit PIN with the numbered buttons when the PIN screen is shown. Do not forget your PIN. ≥Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)

[8 No Limit [1] to [7] Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding

[0 Lock All] Prohibits play of all DVD-Video. ≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected) [Unlock Recorder] [Change PIN] [Change Level] [Temporary Unlock]

] All DVD-Video can be played.

ratings recorded on them.

Soundtrack

[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Original] [Other¢¢¢¢]

Subtitles

[Automatic] [English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Other¢¢¢¢]

Menus

[English] [German] [French] [Italian] [Spanish] [Other¢¢¢¢]

Settings for Recording

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Recording time in EP mode

Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode. [EP ( 6hours )] You can record for 6 hours on an unused 4.7GB

[EP ( 8hours )

disc.

] You can record for 8 hours on an unused 4.7GB

disc.

Chapter Creation

Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 50)

[Automatic

[Off] No chapter start points are set.

] [5 minutes]

Recording Format

Titles recorded to the HDD with “Recording Format” set to “Video format” can be copied to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using high speed mode. However, aspect, etc. is restricted. (> 58, Important) We recommend turning the setting “VR format” if high speed copy to DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme. This setting is effective when recording from a television programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.

[VR format] High speed copy from HDD is possible only to

[Video format

DVD-RAM.

] You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press

[2, 1] to select “Yes“, then press [OK]. ≥You are no longer able to switch the audio when

watching a programme on an input channel on the TV connected to this unit (e.g., AV1, etc).

≥In some cases, copying to DVD-R, etc. using the

high speed mode does not work (> 58, Important)

DVD Speed for High Speed Copy

Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X discs).

[Maximum [Normal ( Silent )] Selecting “Normal ( Silent )” means the noise

]

generated by this unit is less than “Maximum”, however the time required for copying will double (approximately).

Notes

[DVD-V] Choose the language for audio, subtitles and disc menus. If a language which is not recorded is selected, or if languages are already fixed on the disc, the language set as the default on the disc will be played instead.

[Original] The original language of each disc will be

selected.

[Other¢¢¢¢] This is the language code setting. Input a

code number with the numbered buttons (> 87, Language code list).

[Automatic] If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is

not available, subtitles of that language will automatically appear if available on the disc.

VQT2J27

Picture and Sound Settings

Others

Setup

(> 72, Accessing the Setup Menu) All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Picture

3, 4 select “Picture” > 1 > 3, 4 select item

Setup

Tuning Disc

Picture

Sound Display

Connection Others

Comb Filter Still Mode Seamless Play

TAB

SELECT

RETURN

Off

Automatic

Comb Filter

Select the picture sharpness when recording. The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC” (> 76)

[On] Select it to record clear picture if the picture is noisy when

“Off” is selected.

] Normally, use this setting.

[Off

Still Mode

Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 96, Frame and Field).

[Automatic

]

[Field] Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is

selected.

[Frame] Select if you cannot see small text or fine patterns

clearly when “Automatic” is selected.

Seamless Play

Select the play mode between Playlists (Video)chapter segments and partially deleted titles.

] The chapters in Playlists (Video) are played seamlessly. This

[On

does not work when there are several audio types included on the Playlists (Video) and when using Quick View (Play k1.3). Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may change slightly.

[Off] The points where chapters in Playlists (Video) change are

played accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.

Sound

3, 4 select “Sound” > 1 > 3, 4 select item

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture

Sound

Display Connection Others

Dynamic Range Compression Bilingual Auto Selection Digital Audio Output Audio Mode for XP Recording Audio Mode for DV Input

SELECT

TAB

RETURN

Off M1

Dolby Digital

Stereo 1

Digital Audio Output

Change the settings when you have connected equipment through the unit’s Digital Audio Output terminal (> 81). Press [OK] to show the following settings.

PCM Down Conversion

Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96kHz. Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the above settings if the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the disc has copy protection.

[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the

connected equipment cannot process signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the connected

[Off

equipment can process signals with sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)

Dolby Digital

Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes Dolby Digital signals on other connected equipment, or to convert the signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.

[Bitstream

] When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in Dolby

Digital decoder.

DTS

Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes DTS signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.

[Bitstream

] When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS

decoder.

[PCM] When connected to equipment without a built-in DTS

decoder.

MPEG

Choose whether to output by “Bitstream”, which processes MPEG audio signals on other connected equipment or to convert the signals to “PCM” (2ch) on the unit before output.

[Bitstream] When connected to equipment with a built-in MPEG

decoder.

] When connected to equipment without a built-in

[PCM

MPEG decoder.

Audio Mode for XP Recording

Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode. [Dolby Digital

] (> 96) [LPCM] (> 96)

≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of

normal XP mode recordings.

≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected

LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.

Audio Mode for DV Input

You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV IN terminal (> 29).

[Stereo 1 [Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)

[Mix] Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2. When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in

advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).

] Records audio (L1, R1)

subsequent to original recording.

Incorrect settings can cause noise to be output which can be harmful to your ears and speakers, and audio will not be recorded properly on media such as mini discs. Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.

Dynamic Range Compression

[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only) Change the dynamic range (> 96) for easier listening in low volume.

[On] [Off

]

Bilingual Audio Selection

When recording bilingual programmes from equipment connected to the DV IN terminal of this unit, select whether to record the main or secondary audio type.

][M 2]

[M 1

VQT2J27

Display and Connection Settings/System Settings

Others

Setup

(> 72, Accessing the Setup Menu) All factory default settings are indicated with “Underlined” text.

Display

3, 4 select “Display” > 1 > 3, 4 select item

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound

Display

Connection

Others

On-Screen Messages Unit’s Display New Channel Message Screen Saver FUNCTION MENU Display

SELECT

TAB

RETURN

5 sec.

Bright

Automatic

On Off

On-Screen Messages

Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information screen (> 46) disappears automatically. The length of time the Control Panel (> 45) is displayed can also be changed, but “Off” does not work.

[Off] The digital channel information is not displayed. [3 sec.] [5 sec.

] [7 sec.] [10 sec.]

Unit’s Display

Changes the brightness of the unit’s display. Regardless of the setting, when “Power Save in Standby” (> 78) is activated and this unit is turned off, the unit’s display is turned off.

][Dim]

[Bright

New Channel Message

Set whether to display the confirmation message when a DVB channel is added.

[Automatic

] When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be

informed automatically.

[Off] The Channel Messages are not shown.

Screen Saver

[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes

while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].

[Off]

FUNCTION MENU Display

[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be

displayed. (> 43)

]

[Off

Connection

3, 4 select “Connection” > 1 > 3, 4 select item

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound

Display

Connection

Others

TV Aspect TV System HDMI Settings AV 1 Output AV 2 Settings

TAB

SELECT

RETURN

16:9 PAL

Video

TV Aspect

This setting needs to be changed when connected to a 4:3 standard aspect TV.

] [4:3] [Letterbox]

[16:9

Notes

Aspect 4:3/16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3 standard aspect television 16:9 widescreen television

≥ [16:9]: When connected to a 16:9 widescreen

television.

≥ [4:3]: When connected to a 4:3 aspect

television, side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture (> 96, Pan & Scan).

≥

[Letterbox]:

When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,widescreen picture is shown in the letterbox style (> 96).

TV System

Change this setting if you connect an NTSC television or to record NTSC video from another source.

1. Press [3, 4] to select the TV System, then press

[OK].

[PAL]

– Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system television.

Programmes recorded using NTSC are played as PAL 60.

– Select to record television programmes and PAL input from

other equipment.

– [HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on the

HDD.

[NTSC]

– Select when connecting to an NTSC television.

Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.

– Select to record NTSC input from other equipment. – [HDD] Select when playing an NTSC input title recorded on the

HDD.

The confirmation screen appears.

2. Press [2] to select “Yes”, then press [OK].

Tips

To change the setting all at once (PAL/NTSC)

While stopped, press and hold [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 seconds.

Notes

≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have

PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.)

≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be

used. During recording, timer recording standby or EXT LINK standby, this

≥

unit cannot play discs that do not match the “TV System” (PAL/NTSC) setting. Set “TV System” to match the discs before playing them. Change back the setting after playback of disc, otherwise recording may not record propery.

VQT2J27

HDMI Settings

§1

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

HDMI Video Format

§2

You can only select items compatible with the connected equipment. If you are concerned about output picture quality, it may be improved by changing the setting.

– To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need to

connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, the other

equipment must also be 1080p compatible. [576i/480i] [576p/480p] [720p] [1080i] [1080p] When setting video output to “1080p”, we

recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion etc.

[Automatic

] Automatically selects the output resolution best

suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i, 720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).

Aspect for 4:3 Video

To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television. 4:3 picture from HDMI output will be slightly smaller than that from the other outputs, e.g. Scart, this is not a malfunction of the unit.

] Picture output expands left or right.

[4:3

[16:9] Picture is output as original aspect with side

panels.

Digital Audio Output

[HDMI and Optical] [Optical Only] Select when this unit is connected to an

amplifier with an optical digital audio cable (> 81) and connected to a TV with an HDMI cable (> 81) and you want to enjoy the highest quality of audio from discs.

VIERA Link

[On] [Off] Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.

AV1 Output

Set according to the terminal of the connected TV. [Video]

Select when a TV that can receive a composite signal is connected. [S Video]

Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video signal. [RGB 1]

Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.

]

[RGB 2 Select when a TV that can receive an RGB signal is connected. If you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.

≥If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select

“RGB 1” or “RGB 2”.

AV2 Settings

Set to match the connected equipment. ≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

AV2 Input

Set to “RGB / Video” or “RGB” when receiving or recording RGB output from external equipment.

[RGB / Video

] The unit automatically detects whether the input

signal from the AV2 terminal is an RGB signal or

other signals and makes settings. [RGB] [Video] [S Video]

Ext Link

[Ext Link 1] When this unit is connected to a digital satellite

[Ext Link 2] When external equipment with a timer function is

§1

Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may not be able to change the settings.

§2

Choose the setting to suit your TV and preference.

Others

3, 4 select “Others” > 1 > 3, 4 select item

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture Sound

Display Connection

Others

receiver with a 21-spin Scart cable and this unit receives a control signal. Start and stop timings of recording are controlled by the control signal.

connected. Recording is continued while the image signal is being sent to the unit from the external equipment. Recording is stopped when the image signal is halted by turning the external equipment off.

Remote Control Clock Owner ID Standby Settings DivX Registration System Update Initialize

TAB

DVD 1

SELECT

RETURN

Remote Control (> 87)

[DVD 1] [DVD 2] [DVD 3]

Clock (> 14)

Owner ID (> 13)

In order to prevent another person from using this unit if it is stolen, you can set a PIN number and input your personal information. Once the PIN number has been set, you cannot return to the factory preset. Make sure not to forget this.

≥PIN number ≥Name ≥ House No. ≥Postcode

VQT2J27

System Settings

Standby Settings

≥Press [[OK] to show the following settings.

Power Save in Standby

[On] It will go into the Power Save in Standby mode when the

[On Timer]

[Off] It is possible to start quickly from the standby mode.

1 Press [3, 4] to select “On Timer” and press [OK].

2 Press [3, 4] to set the start time (hour). 3 Press [2, 1] to select the stop time and press [3, 4]

4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.

≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting. ≥You can set start and stop time by the hour. ≥If the clock has not been set, “Power Save in Standby” is activated

at all hours.

unit is in standby mode.

“Power Save in Standby” is set to activate during the set time period.(> below)

(Quick Start mode)

Power Save in Standby

Power Save On Timer

From

Number

Saves standby power consumption

0 9

by disabling Quick Start function and AV2 loop-through in standby.

CHANGE

SELECT

Press OK to manually set the period of Power Save.

RETURN

:00

to set the stop time (hour).

Auto Standby

Set the time to automatically turn the unit off. After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off once the set time has passed.

[30 minutes] [1 hour]

[2 hours] [4 hours

] [6 hours]

[Off] The unit will not automatically turn off.

Auto Standby after OTR

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not

operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing One Touch Recording (> 26).

[Off]

Auto Standby after Copy

[On] This unit is turned to standby mode when this unit is not

operated for approximately 5 minutes after completing copy.

]

[Off

RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )

[On] Broadcast signals are output from this unit.

[Off] Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” when the confirmation

TV can receives broadcast signals even if this unit is in standby mode when connecting TV with this unit using the RF cable (

> 80) .

message is displayed. Broadcast signals are not output from this unit to reduce standby power consumption. ≥Power consumption is lowered additionally when “Power

Save in Standby” is activated.

≥If this unit turns into standby mode when connecting TV

with this unit using the RF cable, proper broadcast images do not appear on TV.

DivX Registration

You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) content (> 39).

System Update

In order to update this unit, the TV Guide download, and support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit periodically performs software updates.

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings. ≥Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an

unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates, you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.

≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update is in

progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.

≥TV Guide download will take approximately 30 minutes.

While the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by switching on the unit.

≥To avoid hearing the startup sound of System Update for the unit,

perform the following steps. – Select the time for Software Update (> below, TV Guide/Software

search period).

– Set “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software Update in

Standby” (> below) to “Off”, and update manually (> below, Software Update Search Now).

TV Guide Download in Standby

[On] When the unit is turned off, TV Guide data is downloaded

automatically.

[Off]

Software Update in Standby

[On] You can perform the unit updates automatically when the

unit is turned off.

[Off]

TV Guide/Software search period

Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download and updates when the unit is turned off. This can only be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” or “Software Update in Standby” is set to “On”. ≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have

selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.

When the GUIDE Plus+ system is not available

[Automatic

] The unit will give priority to searching for update

data at midnight. [02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00] [14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]

When the GUIDE Plus+ system is available

[Automatic

]

[Daytime] Updating is executed during daytime (06:00–

22:00).

Software Update Search Now

Start the search for new software manually. A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn this unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of data. A message shows that the update has finished. ≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”,

then press [OK].

GUIDE Plus+ System Information

You can check the condition of GUIDE Plus+ system of this unit.

Post Code

You can input the postal code which is necessary to download area specific information of GUIDE Plus+ system.

Initialize

≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.

Shipping Condition

This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Slideshow Settings, Owner ID and clock settings, etc.

[Yes] [No

]

≥The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. ≥Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

Default Settings

This returns Setup menus to default settings, except for the tuning settings, clock settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID and remote control code, etc.

[Yes] [No

≥The timer recording programmes are also cancelled. ≥Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.

]

VQT2J27

Other Settings

Other Setting s

DRIVE

SELECT

PAGE

VOL

DRIVE

SELECT

Channel Select

Volume

Turn TV on/off

Input select

Child Lock

The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.

If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.

Tips

To cancel the Child Lock

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears.

Using the Unit’s Remote Control to Operate the TV

You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the television channel and change the television volume.

1 Point the remote control at the TV. 2 While pressing and holding [Í TV], enter the code

from the table below using the numbered buttons.

e.g., 01: press [0] > [1]

3 Test the TV functions of the remote control for

operability.

– If the functions do not work, repeat steps 1 to 3 using

different codes, if available. Some TVs may not be compatible with the unit’s remote control.

Remote Control Codes for the TV

Manufacturer Code No.

Panasonic 01/02/03/04 AIWA 35 AKAI 27/30 BEJING 33 BEKO 05/71/72/73/74 BENQ 58/59 BP 09 BRANDT 10/15 BUSH 05 CENTREX 66 CHANGHONG 69 CURTIS 05 DAEWOO 64/65 DESMET 05 DUAL 05 ELEMIS 05 FERGUSON 10/34 FINLUX 61 FISHER 21

Manufacturer Code No.

FUJITSU 53 FUNAI 63/67 GOLDSTAR 05/50/51 GOODMANS 05 GRADIENTE 36 GRUNDIG 09 HIKONA 52 HITACHI 05/22/23/40/41 INNO HIT 05 IRRADIO 30 ITT 25 JINGXING 49 JVC 17/30/39/70 KDS 52 KOLIN 45 KONKA 62 LG 05/50/51 LOEWE 07/46 MAG 52 METZ 05/28 MITSUBISHI 05/19/20/47 MIVAR 24 NEC 36 NOBLEX 33 NOKIA 25/26/27/60/61 NORDMENDE 10 OLEVIA 45 ONWA 30/39/70 ORION 05 PEONY 49/69 PHILCO 41/48/64 PHILIPS 05/06/46 PHONOLA 05 PIONEER 37/38 PROVIEW 52 PYE 05 RADIOLA 05 SABA 10 SALORA 26 SAMSUNG 32/42/43/65/68 SANSUI 05 SANYO 21/54/55/56 SCHNEIDER 05/29/30 SEG 05/69/75/76/77/78 SELECO 05/25 SHARP 18 SIEMENS 09 SINUDYNE 05 SONY 08 TCL 31/33/66/67/69 TELEFUNKEN 10/11/12/13/14 TEVION 52 TEX ONDA 52 THOMSON 10/15/44 TOSHIBA 16/57 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE

YAMAHA 18/41

VQT2J27

Additional Connections

Refere nce

RF IN

HDMI AV

OUT

HDMI IN

RF OUT

This unit

VCR

HDMI cable

21-pin Scart cable

RF coaxial cable

AV1(TV)

AV2 (EXT)

The RF coaxial cable cannot be used for showing pictures from the unit. The unit must be connected using another method, e.g.21-pin Scar t cable to show pictures from the unit on the television set.

You can enjoy high-quality picture by adding the HDMI cable connection (> 12)

AUDIO IN VIDEO IN

This unit

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

Audio/Video cable

Using a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable

“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu is set to “RGB 1” or “RGB 2” (> 77). Make “AV2 Input” settings in the Setup menu (> 77).

Use of the RF coaxial cable

≥ Keep the RF coaxial cables as far away as possible from other cables. ≥ Do not roll up the RF coaxial cables.

≥ Before connection, turn off the mains for all connected equipment and read the appropriate operating

instructions. Connect AC mains lead only after all other connections are complete. BE SURE TO READ THE CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD ON PAGE 3.

Adding a VCR: Connecting to a Television and a Video Cassette Recorder

To the aerial

To record from a VCR

Refer to “Recording from an External Device” (> 29).

Connecting to a Television with Audio/Video Cable (not included)

≥

You can connect this unit to a TV using the audio/video (AV) cable instead of the HDMI cable or the 21-pin Scart cable (>10, 11, 80).

≥

Using a Scart or HDMI cable gives a higher quality picture than this connction.

≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.

VQT2J27

Adding an Amplifer or Receiver

Connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA)

If the 21-pin Scart cable is connected, the following functions are available. ≥ Direct TV Recording (> 26)

Use these connections to play sound through speakers connected to an amplifier or system component.

Using an Audio Cable (not included)

It is possible to output 2-channel stereo sound. ≥ Connect to terminals of the same colour.

AUDIO IN

Amplifier

System Component

Using an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) Cable (not included)

HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).

≥ When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the

HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.

This unit

VIDEO

AUDIO

OUT

Using an Optical Digital Audio Cable (not included)

It is possible to output multi-channel surround sound on DVD-Video.

Amplifier or System Component

OPTICAL IN

Insert fully with this side up. Do not bend cable sharply.

This unit

Regarding VIERA Link “

HDAVI ControlTM” function

”/Q Link)]

≥ It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI

cable.

Recommended part number: RP-CDHS15 (1.5m), RP-CDHS30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHS50 (5.0 m), etc.

≥ Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.

Receiver

HDMI IN

HDMI OUT

AV1(TV)

HDMI IN

This unit

HDMI AV OUT

OPTICAL

DIGITAL AUDIO OUT

(PCM/BITSTREAM)

≥ Connect an amplifier or system component with a built-

in Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG decoder.

≥ Adjust settings in “Digital Audio Output” as needed,

depending on other connections and the amplifer receiver (> 75).

Notes

≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital

audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting “Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 77). In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the television.

≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not meant for DVD. ≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable, check the terminal

shape of the equipment to be connected.

≥ Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” (> 77).

(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)

Notes

≥If connecting to equipment that is only compatible with 2 channel

audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down-mixed (> 96) and output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable (some discs cannot be down-mixed).

≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible

with HDCP. For display units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) that are equipped with a digital DVI input terminal (PC monitors, etc.): Depending on the unit, picture may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable (audio cannot be output).

VQT2J27

Media Handling

Insert label-up.

Press on the centre of the card until it clicks into place.

If you are using a miniSD card, a miniSDHC card, a microSD card or a microSDHC card, insert it into the adaptor that comes with the card. Insert and remove this adaptor from the unit.

e.g., miniSD

Insert the card label up with the cut-off corner on the right.

Removing the card

Press on the centre of the card.

Pull it straight out.

Inserting Discs

1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.

– Insert a disc.

2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close tray.

Notes

≥ Ensure the disc is flat in the tray ≥ When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the

cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.

≥

[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from

one side of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc and turn it over.

Automatic drive select function

[DVD-V] [VCD]

≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically switches

to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.

≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is

automatically selected.

Inserting/Removing the SD Card

When the SD card slot indicator (“SD”) on the unit’s display is flashing, the card is being read from or written to. Do not turn off the unit or remove the card. Such action may result in malfunction or loss of the card’s contents.

≥Inserting foreign objects can cause a malfunction.

Inserting the card

ADAPTER





Inserting/Removing the USB memory

Inserting the USB memory

≥Before inserting any USB memory to this unit, ensure that the data

stored therein has been backed up.

≥Check the orientation of the USB connector and insert it straight in. ≥Insert an USB device while the unit is stopped, so the “USB device”

screen is displayed. Select an item, then press [OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (> 38, 65).

Removing the USB memory

≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory

straight out.

≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may be

damaged.

Disc and Card Care

When using DVD-RAM or DVD-R, remove the disc from the cartridge. Cartridge discs cannot be used.

Holding a disc or card

Handle discs by the edges to avoid inadvertently scratching or getting oil from your fingers on the disc. Do not touch the signal surface of discs (the shiny side) or the terminal surface (the metal part) of SD cards.

Cleaning discs or cards

Discs are not indestructible and occasionally dirt or condensation may appear. Clean by gently wiping with a soft, dry lint-free cloth in a straight line from the centre of the disc to the edge of the disc. Return discs and SD cards to their cases when not in use; this helps to protect against scratches and dirt.

Storing discs and cards

≥Do not place or store discs and cards in the following locations:

– Direct sunlight – Very dusty or humid areas – Near a heat source – Places that undergo extreme shifts in temperature (condensation

can occur)

– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur

≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

Discs to avoid

≥Discs that are not perfectly circular in shape ≥Warped discs, which may not balance properly in your unit, causing

improper operation or damage to the unit

≥Cracked discs ≥Discs with exposed adhesive (from removed stickers or labels, such

as may occur with rental discs or improperly cared-for discs that were previously labeled or re-labeled)

VQT2J27

Frequently Asked Questions

Set up

How can I enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p?

¾ Connect the unit to 1080p compatible HDTV using an

HDMI cable. Set “HDMI Video Format” in the Setup menu to “1080p”. (> 12, 77)

What equipment is necessary to play multi-channel surround sound?

¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit

without other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder and multichannel speakers. (> 81)

Can the headphones and speakers be directly connected to the unit?

¾ You cannot directly connect to the unit. Connect through

the amplifier, TV, etc. (> 81)

Is my TV compatible with progressive output ?

¾ All Panasonic televisions that have 625 (576)/50i · 50p, 525

(480)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the manufacturer if you have another brand of TV.

Please tell me about disc compatibility with this unit.

¾ This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW

(DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are possible). (> 15, 16)

¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording

compatible discs. (> 98)

¾ After recording but before finalising DVD-R, DVD-R DL,

DVD-RW, +R, +R DL. – You may not be able to play and record discs on this unit

after recording them on other Panasonic products or other manufacturers’ equipment.

– You may not be able to play and record discs on other

equipment after recording them on this unit. After finalising the disc, however, you will be able to play it on any DVD-Video compatible player.

Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW compatibility with this unit.

¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been

recorded in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, SVCD (conforming to IEC62107), DivX, MP3, WMA and still pictures (JPEG). Close the session or finalise the disc after recording. This unit can recognize up to 300 folders (groups or albums) and 3000 files (tracks) on a disc with MP3/WMA or still pictures (JPEG). (> 16, 18)

¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with the unit.

Discs

Can I play DVD-Video, and Video CDs bought in another country?

¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not

include “2” or “ALL”. Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)

Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region number be played?

¾ Discs either without region encoding or region code 2 will

not play on this unit.

DVB-T

Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital terrestrial broadcasts?

¾ Any (terrestrial) roof aerial can be used. However,

depending on the area where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult your local TV aerial installer.

Can this unit receive or record High Definition (HD) broadcasts?

¾ No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD)

broadcasts.

VQT2J27

Frequently Asked Questions

GUIDE Plus+

Is it possible to programme a recording, with a start and end time that are different from the GUIDE Plus+ system?

¾ You can manually change the start and end time of

programmes in the Timer Recording menu. But if timings are altered by more than 10 minutes, “Guide Link” will not be able to function. (> 22)

Can I receive GUIDE Plus+ system data via a connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top Box?

¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings

with digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use the External Link feature or your unit’s manual timer programming. (> 28, 30)

How can I cancel a timer programming?

¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and

then press [DELETE ¢]. (> 31)

What happens when I unplug my unit from the household mains socket?

¾ The GUIDE Plus+ system data will not be updated. If the

unit is disconnected from the AC mains for a longer period of time, then the GUIDE Plus+ data is lost. Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. (> 19, steps 1–2) The GUIDE Plus+ system data will then be automatically updated.

USB

What can or cannot be done using the USB port on this unit?

¾ You can play DivX (except for DivX VOD contents), MP3,

WMA or still picture (JPEG) files on a USB memory. (> 38)

¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory

to the HDD, DVD-RAM or SD card. (> 65)

¾ You can copy MP3 or WMA files on a USB memory to the

HDD. (> 66)

¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to

the HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 63)

¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB

memory.

¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory

cannot be formatted on this unit.

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 17) ¾ This unit cannot be connected to a computer and it cannot

record to an external device. i.e. an external hard drive via the USB port.

Music

What will happen if I try to record the same CD multiple times?

¾ You can record the CD, but new album will be made

following the existing album.

Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the disc or USB memory?

¾ No, you cannot.

Recording

Can I record from a commercially purchased video cassette or DVD?

¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVDs are

copy protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.

Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, and +RW recorded on the unit be played on other equipment?

¾ You can play these discs on compatible equipment such as

DVD players after finalising the disc on this unit. [+RW] It is not necessary to finalise +RW. To enable play on other DVD players, please use “Create Top Menu” in the DVD Management menu. (> 71)

¾ In any case, ability to play a disc depends on the condition

of the recording, the quality of the disc, and the capability and format constraints of the DVD player.

¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible

equipment. Not all equipment will play these discs.

Can a digital audio signal from the unit be recorded to other equipment?

¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording

DVD, change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following via the Setup menu: – PCM Down Conversion: “On” – Dolby Digital: “PCM” –DTS: “PCM” – MPEG: “PCM” However, only – As long as digital recording from the disc is permitted. – As long as the recording equipment is compatible with

48 kHz sampling frequency. (> 75)

¾ You cannot record MP3 or WMA signals.

VQT2J27

Messages

On the Unit’s Display

H∑∑, F∑∑ (“∑” stands for a service number.)

≥ An error has occurred. The number following “H” or “F” depends on the status

of the unit. Check the items below and in the Troubleshooting Guide. If the service number still does not disappear after the check, reset the unit (> 87, To restore the unit if it freezes).

≥ If the service numbers fail to clear, note the service numbers and contact a

qualified service person.

DVD (“∑” stands for a number.)

≥ The remote control and the main unit are using different codes. Change the

code on the remote control. (> 87)

GUIDE ≥ GUIDE Plus+ data is being downloaded. (> 78)

HARD ERR

≥ If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where

the unit was purchased.

NoERAS ≥ You cannot delete items on this disc.

≥ The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

NoREAD ≥ The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 82)

≥ The disc may be incompatible or of poor quality. (> 15, 16) ≥ You have used a lens cleaner and it has finished operation. Press [< OPEN/

CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 7)

NoWRIT ≥ You cannot write to this disc.

The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.

FINAL ≥ When the screen asking if you want to finalise the disc appears, the message is

displayed. (> 26)

PLEASE WAIT

≥ Displayed when the unit is started. This is not a malfunction. ≥ The unit is carrying out its recovery process. You cannot operate the unit while

the message is displayed.

PROG FULL

≥ There are already 32 timer recording programmes. Delete unnecessary timer

recording programmes. (> 31)

REMOVE ≥ The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device and turn

the unit off.

SW-DL ≥ The unit is performing a software update. (> 78)

SP 35:50, LP 151h “SP”, “LP” and the numbers are examples.

≥ Available space on the HDD or disc. The example “SP 35:50” is displayed

when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is displayed when over 100 hours are available. “SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.

UNSUPPORT

≥ You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record onto. (> 15, 16) ≥ You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 17)

UNFORMAT

≥ You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL

or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) that has been recorded on other equipment. Format the disc to use it. However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 26)

EXT-L ≥ This unit is in EXT LINK standby. EXT LINK has been turned on and will stop

operation on the unit until the recording has completed. Press [EXT LINK] to stop recording or cancel linked timer. (> 28)

F74 ≥ The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.

If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

F75 ≥ The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data

malfunction. If you have another HDMI cable, try to use it. If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

U59 ≥ The unit is hot.

The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears. Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.

U61 ≥

(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation. Once the display disappears you can use the unit again. If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

U76 ≥ HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not

support copyright protection.

The message are alternately displayed.

VQT2J27

Messages

On the Unit’s Display (Continued)

U80, U81, U99 ≥ The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit

U88 ≥ There was something unusual detected with the disc while recording, playing or

X HOLD ≥ The Child Lock function is activated.

to standby mode. Press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on. If the message persists, perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup menu. (> 73) or “Shipping Condition” (> 78). If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

copying; there was a power failure or the AC mains lead was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. Wait until the message disappears.

≥ If it remains displayed, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.

Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 79)

On the TV

This unit is not authorised to play this protected DivX video.

Cannot finish recording completely. Copy-protect signal was detected.

Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are recorded. Cannot finish recording completely.

Cannot record. Maximum number of titles exceeded.

Cannot playback. TV system is different from the setting. To playback, please change the TV System in Setup.

Cannot play on this unit. ≥ You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 18)

No Disc ≥ The disc is upside down. If it is a single-sided disc, insert it so the label is facing

No folders. ≥ There is no compatible folder on the media. (> 18) No SD CARD

This card is incompatible.

Not enough space in the copy destination. ≥ Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 23, 48, 55, 70)

This is a non-recordable disc. ≥ The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 82) Unable to format. This disc is not formatted properly.

Format it using DVD Management in FUNCTION MENU.

Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours ( in SP mode ) is necessary.

Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD. Please delete unwanted titles.

Rental Expired. ≥ The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX)

$ ≥ The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.

≥ You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different

registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 39)

≥ The programme was copy-protected.

≥ The HDD or disc may be full. ≥ The maximum number of title has been exceeded. (> 25) ≥ [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by erasing unwanted titles. Even if you

erase recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is no increase in disc space. Available recording space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW disc increases when the last title is deleted (space may increase slightly when you delete other titles). (> 23, 48, 70)

≥ Use a new disc. ≥ You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of

the TV system currently selected on the unit. Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 76)

≥ Turn the unit off and re-insert the card. (> 82)

up.

≥ Ensure the disc is flat in the tray

≥ The card is not inserted. If this message is displayed with a compatible card

already inserted, turn off the unit, remove and then re-insert the card. (> 17,

82)

≥ The format of the card inserted is incomplete. (> 17)

≥ Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the

“Destination Capacity” is not exceeded. (> 61, 64, 67)

≥ The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or

unfinalised DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, or +RW disc. (> 15)

≥ You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW disc.

Format the disc with the unit. (>

≥ Y

ou cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.

Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

≥ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on

the HDD or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are greater than 499. Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 23, 48, 70)

(> 39)

70)

VQT2J27

Troubleshooting Guide

When Other Panasonic Products Respond to this Remote Control

Use this function to synchronize the codes for the remote control and the main unit when there are other Panasonic products close to your unit.

With the unit stopped

1 Press [FUNCTION MENU]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others”, then press [OK]. 3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup”, then press [OK]. 4 Press [3, 4] to select 5 Press [3, 4] to select “Remote Control”, then press

[OK].

6 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or

“DVD 3”) and press [OK].

Setup

Tuning Disc Picture

Sound

Display

Connection Others

Remote Control

Press “” and “OK” together for more than 5 seconds on the remote control.

RETURN

7 While pressing and holding [OK], press and hold the

numbered button [1], [2] or [3] corresponding to the code set in step 6 for more than 5 seconds to set.

8 Press [OK] to complete.

When the following indicator appears on the unit’s display

“Others”, then press [1].

To Reset This Unit

To reset the unit’s settings

All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings PIN, Owner ID, Clock and remote control code, etc. return to the factory preset. The timer recording programmes and Favourites are also cancelled.

When this unit is turned on and stopped.

Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit for about 5 seconds .

– The Auto-Setup starts automatically. (> 13)

To reset the ratings level settings

When this unit is turned on and stopped.

1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the disc tray. 2 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive. 3 Press and hold [¥ REC] and [1](PLAY/a1.3) on the

main unit for about 5 seconds.

To restore the unit if it freezes

On the main unit

Press and hold [Í/I] for more than 3 seconds.

– The unit is turned off.

– Change the code on the remote control to match the code

displayed for the main unit (> step 7).

Tips

To return to the previous screen

Press [RETURN ].

To exit the screen

Press [EXIT].

Language code list

Enter the code with the numbered buttons.

Abkhazian: 6566 Afar: 6565 Afrikaans: 6570 Albanian: 8381 Amharic: 6577 Arabic: 6582 Armenian: 7289 Assamese: 6583 Aymara: 6589 Azerbaijani: 6590 Bashkir: 6665 Basque: 6985 Bengali; Bangla:

6678 Bhutani: 6890 Bihari: 6672 Breton: 6682 Bulgarian: 6671 Burmese: 7789 Byelorussian: 6669 Cambodian: 7577

Catalan: 6765 Chinese: 9072 Corsican: 6779 Croatian: 7282 Czech: 6783 Danish: 6865 Dutch: 7876 English: 6978 Esperanto: 6979 Estonian: 6984 Faroese: 7079 Fiji: 7074 Finnish: 7073 French: 7082 Frisian: 7089 Galician: 7176 Georgian: 7565 German: 6869 Greek: 6976 Greenlandic: 7576 Guarani: 7178

Gujarati: 7185 Hausa: 7265 Hebrew: 7387 Hindi: 7273 Hungarian: 7285 Icelandic: 7383 Indonesian: 7378 Interlingua: 7365 Irish: 7165 Italian: 7384 Japanese: 7465 Javanese: 7487 Kannada: 7578 Kashmiri: 7583 Kazakh: 7575 Kirghiz: 7589 Korean: 7579 Kurdish: 7585 Laotian: 7679 Latin: 7665 Latvian, Lettish: 7686

Lingala: 7678 Lithuanian: 7684 Macedonian: 7775 Malagasy: 7771 Malay: 7783 Malayalam: 7776 Maltese: 7784 Maori: 7773 Marathi: 7782 Moldavian: 7779 Mongolian: 7778 Nauru: 7865 Nepali: 7869 Norwegian: 7879 Oriya: 7982 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Persian: 7065 Polish: 8076 Portuguese: 8084 Punjabi: 8065 Quechua: 8185

Rhaeto-Romance:

8277 Romanian: 8279 Russian: 8285 Samoan: 8377 Sanskrit: 8365 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Serbian: 8382 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Shona: 8378 Sindhi: 8368 Singhalese: 8373 Slovak: 8375 Slovenian: 8376 Somali: 8379 Spanish: 6983 Sundanese: 8385 Swahili: 8387 Swedish: 8386 Tagalog: 8476 Tajik: 8471

Tamil: 8465 Tatar: 8484 Telugu: 8469 Thai: 8472 Tibetan: 6679 Tigrinya: 8473 Tonga: 8479 Turkish: 8482 Turkmen: 8475 Twi: 8487 Ukrainian: 8575 Urdu: 8582 Uzbek: 8590 Vietnamese: 8673 Volapük: 8679 Welsh: 6789 Wolof: 8779 Xhosa: 8872 Yiddish: 7473 Yo

r u ba: 8979

Zulu: 9085

VQT2J27

Troubleshooting Guide

Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.

The following does not indicate a problem with the unit:

≥ Regular disc rotating sound. ≥ Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions. ≥ Image disturbance during search. ≥ Periodic interruptions to the reception due to digital satellite broadcasting breaks. ≥ Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save in Standby” is activated. ≥ Operations are not working due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again using a Panasonic disc.) ≥ The unit freezing due to the activation of one of its safety devices (> 87, To restore the unit if it freezes). ≥ When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound.

General Issues: Power

No power. The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].

¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active

household mains socket. (> 11 )

¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in

recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [Í] is pressed). Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. (> 28)

¾ Check the fuse in the plug.

The unit switches to standby mode. The unit is turned off automatically.

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on

the main unit to turn the unit on.

¾ If you connected this unit to an “

TV with an HDMI cable, or connected this unit to a Q Linkcompatible TV with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable, this unit will be automatically set to standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (> 44)

This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.

¾ This is a normal phenomenon when using VIERA Link

(HDAVI Control 4 or later). For details please read the operating instructions for the TV.

HDAVI Control” compatible

General Issues: Displays

The display is dim.

¾ Change “Unit’s Display” in the Setup menu. (> 76)

“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.

¾ Set the clock. (> 14)

The time recorded on the disc and the available time shown do not add up. The displayed time of this unit is different from the actual recording time or MP3/WMA recording time.

¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times. ¾ [-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The remaining capacity does not

increase even if titles are deleted.

¾ Available space on a DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW

disc increases when you delete the last title (space may increase slightly when you delete other titles).

¾ If you record or edit about 200 times or more, the remaining

capacity of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, and +R DL is reduced and then recording or editing may be disabled (for the second layer on DVD-R DL and +R DL, this happens after about 60 times).

¾ The time during searching may not be displayed accurately.

The clock is not correct.

¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic

time correction function may not work.In this case, “Automatic” is automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting does not work, set the time manually. (> 14)

VQT2J27

Compared to the actual recorded time, the elapsed time displayed is less. (Only when recording in NTSC)

¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the

number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to one second. There will be a slight difference between the time displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual one-hour elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes 56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.

The clock does not display on the unit when switched to standby.

¾ Ensure “Power Save in Standby” is deactivated. (> 78)

General Issues: Operation

Cannot operate the TV with unit’s remote control.

¾ Change the manufacturer code on the remote control.

(> 79)

¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control

again after changing the batteries. (> 87)

The remote control doesn’t work.

¾ The remote control code is wrong. Change to the correct

code. (> 87)

¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones.

(> 7)

¾ Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the

main unit. (> 7)

¾ Remove obstacles between the remote control and the

main unit.

¾ Remove dust from the transmission window and the unit’s

sensor.

¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/

transmission.

¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas

that may be subject to sun exposure.

¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again

after changing the batteries. (> 79)

¾ If the “X HOLD” is displayed on the unit’s front display, the

Child Lock function is activated. (> 79)

¾ If the “EXT-L” is displayed on the unit’s front display, Linked

timer recordings with external equipment is in recording standby. (> 28)

The unit is on but cannot be operated.

¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected

properly. (> 20, 21)

¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc. ¾ The unit is warm (“U59” appears on the unit’s display). Wait

until “U59” disappears. (> 85)

¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.

Reset the unit as follows: Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode. If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit (> 87, To restore the unit if it freezes).

¾ The unit cannot be operated while performing an update.

“SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display while it is updating. Please wait until the “SW-DL” disappears. (> 78)

“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be ejected.

¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. The disc may

be defective. Do the following to eject the disc. Try another disc.

1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch to standby mode.

If the unit doesn’t switch to standby mode, reset the unit (> 87, To restore the unit if it freezes).

2 While the unit is turned off, press and hold [∫] and

[CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. (Ejection may take extra time depending on discs.)

Cannot eject a disc.

¾ The unit is recording. ¾ The unit may have a problem. Eject the disc as in 2 above. ¾ Linked timer recordings with external equipment is in

recording standby (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display blinks when [Í] is pressed.) Press [EXT LINK] to cancel the recording standby. If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (> 28, 79)

Startup is slow.

¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:

– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted. – The clock is not set. – Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is

connected.

– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

¾ Deactivate “Power Save in Standby” in the Setup menu.

(> 78)

General Issues: GUIDE Plus+

The GUIDE Plus+ system does not receive any data.

¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 14) ¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception),

the GUIDE Plus+ system may not be able to receive any data.

¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.

¾ Some stations are not supported by the GUIDE Plus+

system.

¾ Programme the timer recording manually. (> 30) ¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

The GUIDE Plus+ information is not displayed properly.

¾ There was a programme change or GUIDE Plus+

information from a broadcast station was possibly not correctly transmitted. Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the GUIDE Plus+ system provider or station provider.

The GUIDE Plus+ data is not updated.

¾ The unit must be in standby mode in order to update the

data. If the unit is in EXT LINK mode (“EXT-L” lights up in the unit’s display), then the data update may also not work.

¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly. (> 14) ¾ Make sure that “TV Guide Download in Standby” is set to

“On” in the Setup menu. (> 78)

General Issues: DVB-T

Digital broadcasts cannot be received.

¾ Check the connections. (> 10, 11, 80) ¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet. ¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV

station, or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

TV reception worsens after connecting the unit.

¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided

between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.

VQT2J27

Troubleshooting Guide

General Issues: DVB-T (Continue)

After “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” or “DVB Auto Setup by Region” only some or no DVB channels are found.

¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB

transmissions.

¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for

DVB.

¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

Picture regularly breaks up on some channels, “No Signal” message is displayed.

¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal

Strength” are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (> 73)

¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for

DVB.

¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household

appliances such as light switches, fridges, etc. may cause picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.

¾ Check aerial connection. ¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning”.

(> 73)

¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or all channels.

¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or

distant lightning storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort momentarily.

¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used

electrical appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy” ignition system.

¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

Unusual station sorting.

¾ The station sorting of this unit is pre-defined. Use

Favourites to sort the stations as you want them. (> 72)

The digital channel information does not appear.

¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen

Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 76)

¾ The digital channel information will not appear during

playback or recording.

¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

After the Auto-Setup, there aren’t any stations in the station list although found stations were displayed during Auto-Setup.

¾ “Shipping Condition” was performed or the unit was in the

delivery status. The Auto-Setup was then started and interrupted. Do an Auto-Setup again and let it continue right through to the end.The data is only saved after this has been completed.

The Signal Strength is over 100% (> 10)

¾ Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial. (> 73)

After performing an software update, you can no longer receive broadcasts.

¾ Depending on the content of the software update, some

settings may have returned to the preset values. Perform “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu and then set the channel.(> 13, 78)

General Issues: VIERA Link

VIERA Link doesn’t work.

¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is

displayed on the front display when the unit is powerng on.

¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 77) ¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected

device.

¾ Some functions may not work depending on the version of

“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function.

¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with an

HDMI cable was changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control” may not work. In this case, perform the following operations.

1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with

the power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.

2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”

function to off, and then set to on again. (For more information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)

3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this

unit, and after this unit’s screen is displayed, check that “HDAVI Control” is working.

The Control Panel does not appear.

¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV

with “HDAVI Control 2” or later function. (> 45)

The operation on this unit (music playback etc.) is interrupted.

¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you

press buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA Link functions.

No Digital Teletext

¾ Not all functions of Digital Teletext work on this unit. ¾ When subtitle is on or additional information in the digital

channel information is displayed, Digital Teletext does not work.

¾ Perform “DVB Auto Setup by Signal Quality” in the Setup

menu. (> 73)

VQT2J27

General Issues: USB

The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.

¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then

insert again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 82) ¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not

compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory may be damaged.) (> 17, 18)

¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file

extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 18)

¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again. ¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or

a USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.

¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 17) ¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the

USB memory may not be recognized by this unit.

Playback Issues: Picture

The images from this unit do not appear on the TV. Picture is distorted.

¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (> 10, 11,

12, 80, 81)

¾ Try connecting an alternative cable. ¾ Make sure recorder is connected to an appropriate AV input

of the TV. (> 10, 11, 12, 80, 81)

¾ Make sure the TV’s input setting (e.g., AV1) is correct. ¾ The TV isn’t compatible with RGB signals.

Set “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu to “Video”. (> 77)

¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system

used by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 76)

¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc

that matches with this unit’s TV system.

¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.

Titles recorded with 16:9 aspect are stretched vertically.

¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the

following cases. – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or

“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode. – If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW. It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.

There is a lot of after-image when playing video.

¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 69)

There is no apparent change in picture quality when making adjustments in the Picture menu using the on-screen display.

¾ The effect cannot be seen with certain types of video.

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an

HDMI cable) When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, but you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the beginning of the title.

The picture is distorted during play, or video will not play correctly.

¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor

reception or unfavourable weather conditions.

¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear

briefly between recorded titles in the following situations: – between titles recorded with different recording modes. – between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios. – between scenes recorded with different resolutions. – between playlist chapters.

¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly. (> 10, 11,

12, 80, 81)

¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.

TV reception worsens or becomes impossible after connecting the unit.

¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided

between the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal booster, available from electronics retailers.

¾ Broadcast signals may not be output from this unit’s RF

OUT terminal. Select “On” in “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” in the Setup menu.(> 78)

Picture does not appear during timer recording.

¾ Timer recordings work regardless of whether the unit is on

or off. To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the unit on.

The screen changes automatically.

¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the

display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. Press [OK] to return to the previous screen.

¾ Set “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu to “Off” to turn off the

screen saver function. (> 76)

The 4:3 aspect ratio picture expands left and right. Screen size is wrong.

¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” in

the Setup menu to “16:9”. (> 77)

¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu.

(> 76) It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to your television’s operating instructions.

Playback Issues: Sound

No sound. Low volume. Distorted sound. Cannot hear the desired audio type.

¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output”

settings. Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected one. (> 10, 11, 12, 75, 77, 81)

¾ Check if TV is muted. ¾ Check if amplifier is muted. ¾ Sound is not output while fast-forwarding during chasing

playback and simultaneous record and playback.

¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created.

(DivX)

¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is

output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.

¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are

connected with HDMI cables. Reduce the number of connected devices.

¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI

cable, set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup menu. (> 77)

¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be

distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.

¾ Make sure the connections are pushed in firmly.

(> 10, 11, 12, 80, 81)

¾ Try connecting an alternative cable.

VQT2J27

Troubleshooting Guide

Playback Issues: Sound (Continued)

Cannot switch audio.

¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.

– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video

format), +R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.

– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP

Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 75)

¾ When recording a digital broadcast with multiple audio

channels, this unit will record only the audio channel selected in “DVB Multi Audio” in the on-screen display. The audio channel cannot be switched during playback. (> 69)

¾ You have used a digital connection. Set “Dolby Digital” to

“PCM” or connect using audio cables (analogue connection). (> 75, 81)

¾ There are discs whose audio cannot be changed due to

how the disc was created.

Playback Issues: Operation

Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is pressed. Play starts but then stops immediately.

¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 82) ¾ The disc is dirty, scratched or marked. (> 82) ¾ You tried to play a blank disc or a disc that is unplayable on

the unit. (> 15, 16, 18)

¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the

equipment used for recording.

¾ You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title

that was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to copyright protection.

¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using EP ( 8 hours ) mode,

play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM. In this case use EP ( 6 hours ) mode. (> 74)

¾ You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording. ¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where

you purchased it. (DivX) (> 39)

¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or

messages are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.

No subtitles.

¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc. ¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle

number. (> 68)

Angle cannot be changed.

¾ This function depends on software availability. Angles can

only be changed during scenes where different angles are recorded.

You have forgotten your ratings PIN.

¾ With the tray open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the

DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1](PLAY/ a1.3) on the main unit simultaneously for about 5 or more seconds.

Quick View (Play k1.3) does not work.

¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital. ¾ This does not work while recording in XP or FR mode.

The resume play function does not work.

¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when

–press [∫] several times. – open the disc tray. – [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit. – execute a recording or timer recording.

Audio and video momentarily pause.

¾ This occurs between playlist chapters. ¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted

titles on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high speed mode.

¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View (Play

k1.3).

¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers,

the unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme. However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 15)

DVD-Video is not played.

¾ Ensure the DVD-Video region number for the disc is

correct, and the disc is not defective. (> Cover)

¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.

Change this setting. (> 74)

Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be selected.

¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc. ¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change

the soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus to make changes. (> 20)

VQT2J27

Playback Issues: Operation (Continued)

The Video CD picture does not display properly.

¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV

System” in the Setup menu. (> 76)

¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture

cannot be displayed correctly during search.

Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.

¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs. ¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System”

settings are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 76)

It takes time before play starts.

¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)

Picture stops.

¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 4 GB.

(DivX)

Cannot see the beginning of the title played.

¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an

HDMI cable) When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the beginning of the title.

Playback Issues: Music

ID3 tag of a MP3 file or WMA tag of a WMA file is not completely displayed.

¾ Only the track name ([HD D] [US B] ) and artist name ([HDD])

can be displayed with this unit.

Playback Issues: Still Pictures

Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.

¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copy

or while the unit is standing by for linked timer recording with external equipment.

Recording/Timer

Recording Issues:

Recording/Copying/ External input

Cannot record. Cannot copy.

¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot

be recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 15)

¾ [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] The disc is unformatted.

Format the disc. (> 70)

¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times

they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 24, 96)

¾ The disc is protected with the “DVD Management”

settings.(> 70)

¾ The disc is full or nearly full. Delete unneeded titles ([HDD]

[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use another disc. (> 23, 48, 70)

¾ You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on

this unit. Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.

¾ Video cannot be recorded onto a DVD-R with still images

recorded on it.

¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.

Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. – If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you

will copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the

entire disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP

mode recording is necessary). – If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to

be copied has exceeded 499. (> 23, 48, 70)

¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL discs. However, you can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.

¾ If you repeatedly insert discs or turn the unit on and off

about 50 times or more, the recording or editing of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, and +RW discs may be disabled.

¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R

DL and +RW discs recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other Panasonic DVD Recorders.

¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already

have PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed. (> 76)

¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected. (> 15, 24, 96)

Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.

¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as

Progressive JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 18)

Timer recording does not work properly.

¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer

programme times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 31)

¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (“F” in

the timer recording list is not on.) (> 31)

1 Press [PROG/CHECK]. 2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press the

“Red” button.

¾ The clock is not correct. Set the clock. (> 14) ¾ The programme information in the GUIDE Plus+ system

may not be correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to allow a margin of a few minutes. (> 22)

VQT2J27

Troubleshooting Guide

Recording/Timer

Recording Issues:

Recording/Copying/ External input (Continued)

Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is pressed.

¾ When using the linked timer recording with external

equipment, press [EXTLINK]. (“EXT-L” on the unit’s display disappears.) (> 28)

¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit

while “Power Save in Standby” is not activated (Quick Start mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.

¾ Make sure that the recording drive is selected. Press

[DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording drive. (> 21)

The timer programme remains even after recording finishes.

¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily, weekly or

series timer recording. (> 30, 31, 34)

Part or all of a recorded title has been lost.

¾ If the power shuts down or the AC mains lead is

disconnected from the household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost titles or discs. You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or use a new disc. (> 70)

An unusually loud sound is coming from the rotating DVD-R, etc.

¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R

DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is not a problem.

Cannot record video or sound from the external device.

¾ The external device is not correctly connected. (> 11, 12,

29, 80, 81)

¾ The proper external input channel (AV2, AV3, or DV) is not

selected. Press [INPUT SELECT] to change.

The DV auto recording function does not work.

¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,

check the connections and the DV equipment settings. (> 29)

¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV

equipment appear on the television.

¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time

codes on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.

¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording

may not operate properly.

¾ You can only record audio/video images on a DV tape.

Stripe-shaped black noise is recorded.

¾ An external playback device is interfering with the TV

because the device is too close to the TV. Move the device away from the TV.

The programme name and the recorded title do not match.

¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was

set but the recorded title still has the old programme name.

Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc, disc using the high speed mode.

¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Recording Format” to

“Video format” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “Video format”). (> 74)

¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work,

even if the titles were recorded with “Recording Format” set to “Video format”. (> 58) – [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5

hours or longer)” mode

– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect – [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP”

mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode

¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD

Recorders with “Recording Format” (“Rec for High Speed Copy”) set to “Video format” (“On”), and then copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or +RW discs with high-speed copy.

When copying, it takes a long time even in high speed mode.

¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording.

Even if the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.

¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles. ¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6

hours when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are

not compatible with EP (8 Hours) mode recording.

VQT2J27

Recording Issues: Music

Editing Issues: Still Pictures

Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.

¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS

restrictions, they will not be copied.

¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA

specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.

¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.

Editing Issues: HDD & DVD

Cannot edit.

¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no

available space. Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 23, 48, 70)

Cannot format.

¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.

(> 82)

¾ Disc may be defective or of poor quality. ¾ You tried formatting a disc that is not compatible with the

unit. (> 15, 16, 70)

Cannot create chapters. Cannot mark the start point or the end point during

“Partial Delete” operation.

¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc

when you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written if there is an interruption in the power.

¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures. ¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other.

You cannot set an end point before a start point.

Cannot edit or format a card.

¾ Release the card’s protection setting. (With some cards,

the “Write Protection Off” message sometimes appears on the screen even when protection has been set.) (> 70)

The contents of the card cannot be read.

¾ Remove the card from the slot and then insert again. If this

does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the unit again.

¾ The card format is not compatible with the unit. (The

contents on the card may be damaged.) This unit is compatible with SD Memory Cards that meet SD Card Specifications FAT12 and FAT16 formats, as well as SDHC Memory Cards in FAT32 format. (> 17)

¾ The card contains a folder structure and/or file extensions

that are not compatible with this unit. (> 17, 18)

¾ You can use SD Memory Cards with capacities from 8 MB

to 2 GB and SDHC Memory Cards with capacities from 4 GB to 32 GB.

¾ This unit cannot play AVCHD format motion pictures or

MPEG4 on an SD card.

Copying, deleting, and setting protection takes a long time.

¾ When there are a lot of folders and files, it may sometimes

take a few hours.

¾ When repeating copying or deleting, it may sometimes take

a long time. Format the disc or card. (> 70)

Can not copy JPEG files to disc.

¾ You can copy JPEG files from HDD or SD to DVD-RAM or

DVD-R or from USB memory to DVD-RAM. (> 64)

Cannot delete chapters.

¾ [HDD] [RAM] When the chapter is too short to delete, use

“Combine Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 50)

The available recording time doesn’t increase even after deleting titles on the disc.

¾ Available space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R, or +R DL does

not increase even after deleting previous titles.

¾ Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or +RW

increases when you delete the last title.

Cannot create a Playlist (Video).

¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title

also includes still pictures. Select them individually.

VQT2J27

Glossary

Frame Field Field

Bitstream

This is a signal compressed and converted into digital form. It is converted back to a multi-channel audio signal, e.g., 5.1-channel, by a decoder.

CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)

CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with CPRMcompatible recorders and discs.

Decoder

A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This is called decoding.

Deep Colour

This unit incorporates HDMI (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich, natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate output to suit the connected TV.]

DivX

DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size.

Dolby Digital

This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2 channel) audio, these signals can also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information can be recorded on one disc using this method. When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default audio.

Down-mixing

This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to the 5.1channel audio recorded on DVDs through your TV’s speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing. If this is the case, this unit can only output the front two channels.

Drive

In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD), disc (DVD) and SD card (SD). These perform the reading and writing of data.

DTS (Digital Theater Systems)

This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are possible.

Dynamic range

Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest level of sound before distortion occurs. Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the loudest and softest sounds. This means you can hear dialogue clearly at low volume.

Film and Video

DVD-Video are recorded using either film or video. The unit can determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable method of progressive output.

Film: Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24

frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs recorded at 30 frames per second as well.) Generally appropriate for motion picture films.

Video: Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL

discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs). Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or animation.

Finalise

A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R, etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can finalise DVDR, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL on the unit. After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted to become recordable.

Folder

This is a place on the hard disk, disc or SD card where groups of data are stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.

Formatting

Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM recordable on recording equipment. You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format), SD card, +RW, and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit. Formatting irrevocably erases all contents.

Frame and Field

Frame refers to the single images that constitute the video you see on your TV. Each frame consists of 2 fields.



≥A frame still shows 2 fields, so there may be some blurring between

them, but picture quality is generally better.

≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but

there is no blurring.



HDD (Hard disk drive)

This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.

HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)

Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i) and 1080p (1125p)] from HDMI AV OUT terminal. To enjoy high-definition video a high definition compatible television is required.

JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures. If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc., the data will be compressed to 1/101/100 of its original size. The benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering the degree of compression.

LPCM (Linear PCM)

These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on CDs.

MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)

A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video. MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2. SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)

An audio compression method that compresses audio to approximately 1/10 of its size without any significant loss of audio quality.

Pan & Scan/Letterbox

In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they will be viewed on a widescreen TV (16:9 aspect ratio), so images often don’t fit regular TVs (4:3 aspect ratio). 2 styles of picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.

Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture

Letterbox: Black bands appear at the top and

fills the screen.

bottom of the picture so the picture itself appears in an aspect ratio of 16:9.

Playback control (PBC)

If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and information with menus on the screen. (This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)

VQT2J27

Protection

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES.

You can prevent accidental erasure by setting writing protection or erasure protection.

RGB

This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G), and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them. By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission, noise is reduced for even higher quality images.

Sampling frequency

Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave (analogue signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the original sound.

Signal Quality

This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time (day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial, etc.

Thumbnail

This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display multiple pictures in the form of a matrix.

WMA

WMA is a compression format developed by Microsoft Corporation. It achieves the same sound quality as MP3 with a file size that is smaller than that of MP3.

1080i

In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because 1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of 480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic and rich image.

1080p

In one high-definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

720p

In one high-definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.

Gracenote® Corporate Description

Music and video recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote recognition technology and related content delivery. For more information, please visit www.gracenote.com.

Gracenote

CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and music and video-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS, the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote" logo are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement

This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.

Proprietary Legends

. Gracenote is the industry standard in music

GUIDE Plus+, SHOWVIEW are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

http://www.europe.guideplus.com/

The recording and playback of content on this or any other device may require permission from the owner of the copyright or other such rights in that content. Panasonic has no authority to and does not grant you that permission and explicitly disclaims any right, ability or intention to obtain such permission on your behalf. It is your responsibility to ensure that your use of this or any other device complies with applicable copyright legislation in your country. Please refer to that legislation for more information on the relevant laws and regulations involved or contact the owner of the rights in the content you wish to record or playback.

VQT2J27

Specifications

Power supply: AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz Power consumption: Approx. 32 W Standby mode: (“Power Save in Standby” is

Approx. 0.3 W activated and “RF OUT ( Aerial Signal )” is set to “Off”.)

(“Power Save in Standby” is

Approx. 12 W

not activated.)

Recordable discs:

DVD-RAM: 2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 2–3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)

2–5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)

DVD-R (SL): 1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0)

1–8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1–16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1) DVD-R (DL): 2–4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2–8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0) DVD-RW: 1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1–2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)

2–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2–6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2) +R (SL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)

2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

2.4–16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3) +R (DL): 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4–8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1) +RW: 2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4–4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)

Recording system:

DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format DVD-R: DVD-Video format DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): DVD-Video format DVD-RW: DVD-Video format +R +R DL (Double Layer) +RW

Recording time:

Max. 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc) XP: Approx. 1 hour SP: Approx. 2 hours LP: Approx. 4 hours EP: Approx. 6 hours or 8 hours

Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)

XP: Approx. 55 hours SP: Approx. 110 hours LP: Approx. 221 hours EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours

Playable discs:

DVD-RAM: DVD Video Recording format

DVD-R:

DVD-R DL (Dual Layer):

JPEG DVD-Video format, MP3

§1

, DivX

JPEG DVD-Video format, MP3

§1

, DivX

JPEG

§1

, WMA§1,

§1

, WMA§1,

DVD-RW: DVD Video Recording format,

DVD-Video format +R +R DL (Double Layer) +RW DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD, SVCD CD-R/CD-RW:

§1

CD-DA

MP3

, Video CD§1, SVCD

§1

, WMA§1, JPEG§1, DivX

§2

Internal HDD capacity: 250 GB Optical pick-up:

System with 1 lens, 2 integration units (662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)

LASER Specification

Class 1 LASER Product Wave Length: 780 nm (CDs)

662 nm (DVDs) Laser Power: No hazardous radiation is emitted

with the safety protection

Television system

Tuner System: DVB-T Channel Coverage: UK UHF: 21 to 68 ch RF converter output: Not provided

Video

Video system:

PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields

NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields Recording system: MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)

Notes

≥Specifications are subject to change without notice. ≥Usable capacity will be less (SD Card).

§1, §2

§1

Video In (PAL/NTSC): AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack)

1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

S-Video In (PAL/NTSC): AV2 (21 pin)

1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

RGB In (PAL): AV2 (21pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠,

termination

Video Out (PAL/NTSC): AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin

jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination

S-Video Out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin), 1 Vp-p 75 ≠,

termination

RGB Out (PAL/NTSC): AV1 (21 pin), 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠,

termination

Audio

Recording system: Dolby Digital 2 ch, Linear PCM (XP

mode) Audio In: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3 (pin jack) Input Level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms,

Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Input Impedance: More than 10 k≠ Audio Out: AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin

jack) Output Level: Standard: 0.5 Vrms,

Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz Output Impedance: Less than 1 k≠ Digital Audio Out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby

Digital, DTS, MPEG)

DV Input: IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 Pin :1pc USB

USB port: Type A: 1 pc USB standard: USB 2.0 High Speed Format: FAT16, FAT32 Video (SD-Video)

§3

Codec: MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment

Video Profile)

File Format: SD-Video format conforming

HDMI Output: 19 pin type A: 1pc

(V.1.3a with Deep Colour)

HDMI

This unit supports “HDAVI Control 5” function. SD Card

Slot: SD Memory Card Slot: 1pc Compatible media:

SD Memory Card Memory Card

Format:

FAT12, FAT16 Memory Card, MultiMediaCard)

§5

FAT32

(In case of SDHC Memory

§4

, SDHC

§4

, MultiMediaCard

§5

(In case of SD

Card)

Still Picture (JPEG)

Image File Format: JPEG conforming DCF (Design

rule for Camera File system)

Number of pixels: Between 34a34 and 6400a6400

Video (SD-Video)

§6

Sub sampling: 4:2:2, 4:2:0

Codec: MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment

Video Profile)

File Format: SD-Video format conforming

Others Regional Code: # 2 Operating temperature range: 5 oC to 40 oC Operating humidity range: 10 % to 80 % RH (no

condensation)

Dimensions (WaHaD): 430 mma59 mma286 mm Mass: Approx. 3.5 kg

§1

Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.

§2

Conforming to IEC62107 This unit is not compatible with “Chaoji Video CD” available on the market including CVD, DVCD and SVCD that do not conform to IEC62107.

§3

Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, to HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.

§4

Includes miniSD or miniSDHC Cards. (A miniSD or miniSDHC adaptor needs to be inserted.) Includes microSD or microSDHC Cards. (A microSD or microSDHC adaptor needs to be inserted.)

§5

Long file name is unsupported.

§6

Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from card to HDD or DVD-RAM disc. After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-RAM disc, the playback is possible.

VQT2J27

CAUTION!

(Back of product)

(Inside of product)

THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER. USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.

CAUTION!

≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,

BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE. ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE VENTILATION VENTS.

≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS

WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND SIMILAR ITEMS.

≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS

LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.

≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY

FRIENDLY MANNER.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR PRODUCT DAMAGE, ≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,

DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.

≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES. ≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE NO

USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.

This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please increase separation between the product and the mobile telephone.

The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and easily accessible. The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily operable. To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains, disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries

These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC and 2006/66/EC. By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. Penalties may be applicable for incorrect disposal of this waste, in accordance with national legislation.

For business users in the European Union

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]

These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):

This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the requirement set by the Directive for the

chemical involved.

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

≥For your safety, be sure not to connect or handle the equipment with

wet hands.

VQT2J27

Index

A Adjust the audio quality

(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Adjust the picture quality

(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Album (Music)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 42

Album (Still picture)

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Audio

Digital broadcast

(DVB Multi Audio) . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 73

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Audio Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 46

Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . 32

AV2 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

C Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Channel

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 30

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 50

Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 74

Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Cleaning

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Clock Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Connection

Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11, 80

Amplifier, system component,

receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Digital satellite receiver . . . . . . . . . 11, 12

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 81

Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–12, 80–81

Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Copy

Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 63

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Title/Playlist (Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 57

CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 50

Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 56

D Delete

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55

All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 52

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 57

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53, 55

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 48

Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 75, 77

Digital broadcast

DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 69, 73

DVB Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 73

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 46

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 76

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Digital satellite receiver

Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 12

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Watching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15–16

DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 36, 40, 48, 53

Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Display

Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . 46

Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 38–39, 96

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 29

DVB Multi Audio

Recording with selected audio . . . 21, 30

Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 73

DVB Subtitle

Record with subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 30

Select subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Show subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

E Edit

Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 57

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Enabling discs to be played on other

equipment — Finalise

Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 77

EXT

F Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 96

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70, 96

FR (Flexible recording mode) . . . 25, 27

FREEVIEW+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . 43, 76

G Gracenote

GUIDE Plus+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 33–35

H HDAVI Control . . . . . . . 12, 44–45, 77, 81

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 77, 81

High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

I Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

J JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 40–41, 96

L Language

Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 74

Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 74

Linked timer recordings with external

equipment (SKY Digital STB/digital satellite receiver) — EXT LINK . . 28, 77

LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 96

M Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38–39

JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

WMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 96

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 42

Mode

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Music on HDD

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

N Name

Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 57

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 48

Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 76

O Owner ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

. . . . . . . . . . . . 71

P Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 75

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 56

Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 54

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Protection

Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Still Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Q Q Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

R Ratings level settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Direct TV Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . 29

External Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 29

Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 30–35

Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 69

Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

S Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Series recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Setup menu

ignal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 27

Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 41

Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 74

Start Slideshow

Playlist (Picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Still picture

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Subtitle

Digital broadcast (DVB Subtitle) . . 46, 73

Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68, 74

Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc

(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

T TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 30–35

Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72–73

U USB

Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

V VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . 12, 44–45, 77, 81

W WMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 97

Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 42

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Environment friendly printed on chlorine free bleached paper.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site: http://panasonic.net

Pursuant to at the directive 2004/108/EC, article 9(2)

Panasonic Testing Centre Panasonic Marketing Europe GmbH

Winsbergring 15, 22525 Hamburg, Germany

VQT2J27

F0110TJ0

Panasonic DMREX83 Operating Instructions

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual